JP2015150252A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characteristic in its display with respect to the game machine represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine), an enclosed type game machine, or a reel type game machine (slot machine).SOLUTION: Display means 208 may display a first type display Q11 even when a second type display (error display) is at least displayed (a case shown in Fig. 68 (c)), or even when the second type display (error display) is at least not displayed (a case shown in Fig. 68(b)). The second type display, at least a part thereof, may overlap with at least a part of the fist type display Q11 (the case shown in Fig. 68(c)).

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Conventionally, as a game stand, there are obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. that can be used for winning the game ball. When the player wins, the reels are rotated by turning on the start lever by inserting a ball game machine (pachinko machine) or a medal (game medium) that gives the player benefits such as paying out the award ball, When the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button, the winning combination is displayed when a combination of symbols determined in advance according to the internal determination is displayed on the symbol display window. In addition, a spinning machine (slot machine) or the like that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a specified number of medals when a medal is awarded is known.

  In these game machines, various effects are performed in order to improve the interest of the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In recent game machines, information transmitted from game machines to players is increasing. For example, there has been proposed a game stand that attempts to improve the interest of the game by displaying access information.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a display characteristic.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display,
The first type of display is a display including at least access information;
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the first case,
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the second case,
The first case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means.
The second case is a case where at least the second type of display is not displayed on the display means,
The second type display is a display that may at least partially overlap at least a part of the first type display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of the decorative pattern. (D) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for a normal figure success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for a normal figure success / failure determination, (c) is a table | surface which shows a normal figure change time. . It is a figure which shows the variable prize opening opening / closing pattern table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 determination, (d ) Is a diagram showing a special figure 1 determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation time determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table. The flow of the part which mainly performs the table selection of special figure 1 among the variation time determination processes performed in each of special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) and special figure 1 relevant lottery process (step S231) shown in FIG. 7 is shown. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the part which performs the table selection of special figure 2 among fluctuation | variation time determination processing. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the control unit 400. It is a figure for demonstrating an original mode. 16 is a flowchart of information display control processing (step S318) shown in FIG. (A) is a flowchart of the option menu control process (step S3182) shown in FIG. 17, (b) is a modification of the option menu control process shown in (a), and (c) is an option menu display. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between a screen and a demo screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration screen. It is a transition diagram of an option menu. (A) is a figure which shows the initial screen of the option menu displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, (b) is a figure which shows the display screen of the model information displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, (C) is a figure which shows the display screen of the big hit history displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the sound adjustment screen displayed on the decoration design display apparatus 208, (b) is a figure which shows the brightness adjustment screen displayed on the decoration design display apparatus 208, (c) These are figures which show the initial screen of the user menu displayed on the decorative design display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a transition diagram of a user menu. It is a figure which shows a mode that member registration is performed from the user menu displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that a password input is performed from the user menu displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that a password input is performed from the user menu displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows a mode that deletion of personal data is selected from a user menu, (b) is a figure which shows the personal data clear screen displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, ( c) is a diagram showing a state in which the end of the user menu is selected. It is a figure which shows the example in which the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure was started in the state where the sound adjustment screen shown in FIG. 22A in the option menu is displayed and the volume is adjusted by the player. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example in which a special symbol variation display is started in a state where the member registration screen shown in FIG. 24B is displayed in the user menu. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which the symbol variation display of the special figure is started in a state where the password input screen shown in FIG. 25B is displayed in the user menu. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example in which the symbol variation display of the special figure is started in a state where the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example in which an error has occurred in a state where the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 18 is a flowchart of an access information control process (step S3183) shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example in which a probability change promotion effect is performed at the end of a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows an example in which a probability change promotion effect is performed in the middle of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of FIG. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example in which a pre-reading preproduction effect is performed in the middle of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the other example of the pre-reading preproduction effect performed in the middle of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the two-dimensional code which also used the sub display means. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the two-dimensional code Q3 in the symbol fluctuation display of a special figure. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of another type of two-dimensional code in the special pattern display of a special figure. It is a figure which shows the example by which the two-dimensional code Q3 in the special pattern display of a special figure is hidden by the production movable body. It is a figure which shows the error display in a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the error display during a pattern fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the two-dimensional code Q3 in the way notification. It is a figure which shows QR code (trademark) produced | generated as access information in the pachinko machine 100 of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed a part of circuit block diagram of the 1st sub control part 400 in the pachinko machine 100 of 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a circuit block diagram shown to the same figure (a). It is the figure which showed the modification. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of a ROM 403 and a VRAM 405 before image data is expanded on the VRAM 405. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of a ROM 403 and a VRAM 405 after image data is expanded on the VRAM 405. FIG. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of the decorative pattern. (D) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment in steps. 53 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 53 (q) in steps. (A) is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of the jackpot game, and (b) is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by an ellipse indicated by a one-dot chain line in (a). It is the figure which showed the mode of 15R special jackpot game in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 15R special jackpot game shown in FIG. 56 in steps. It is the figure which showed an example in steps until 15R normal big hit game is started and an electric support state is complete | finished. It is a figure which shows an example in which a two-dimensional code is displayed during a big hit game step by step. It is a figure which shows an example in the state in which a two-dimensional code is displayed by the opportunity of pressing down the production | presentation button 136 during a big hit game. 60 is a diagram showing an example when the notification image shown in FIG. 60 is displayed and the effect button 136 is pressed. FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which operation | movement of the 2nd production movable body is performed during a big hit game. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which operation | movement of the 2nd production movable body is performed in the state where the two-dimensional code was displayed. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which the operation | movement of the production movable body imitating a human right arm is performed during a big hit game. It is a figure which shows an example in which a two-dimensional code is displayed step by step on the big hit more than two consecutive villas. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65 in stages. It is a figure which shows an example by which display and non-display of a two-dimensional code are switched by operation of a player. It is a figure which shows an example in case an error display is carried out in steps. It is a figure which shows the mode of the demonstration screen display in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which has two or more periods which can display a two-dimensional code in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 70 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example by which a two-dimensional code is displayed at the time of an electric support state (usually high probability state) ending. It is a figure which shows an example in which an effect display overlaps a two-dimensional code in steps. It is an example which shows an example in which a two-dimensional code appears in animation step by step. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 74. It is a time chart of the 1st round of JUB jackpot game. It is a time chart showing operation of electric Chu. It is a figure which shows the modification of a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the other display overlapped with the two-dimensional code. (A) is an illustration showing an example in which the error display overlaps with the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 but does not overlap with the two-dimensional code Q11 itself, and (b) shows an error display. It is a figure which shows the example which overlaps with dimension code Q11 itself. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the magnitude | size of the display of a two-dimensional code by operation of a player. It is the figure which showed the example which extends the display time limit of the two-dimensional code with a display time limit. (A) is the figure which showed the example which displays simultaneously the display which shows the kind of two-dimensional code, (b) is the figure which showed the example which an error display overlaps with an identification information display. (A) is the figure which showed the example which displays a some two-dimensional code simultaneously, (b) is the figure which showed the example which an error display overlaps with a some two-dimensional code. It is the figure which showed the example which displays a two-dimensional code on the 1st display means and the 2nd display means. It is the figure which showed the example which the sub display means 209 operate | moves. It is a figure which shows the example of the pachinko machine by which the touch-panel type display means is mounted. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 Chance button lamp 138 for causing button 136 to emit light, ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return instruction for a player's balance to the card unit And a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 190 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, a starting hole for winning a game ball by changing the strength at which the game ball is launched by a player's operation is described below. It can be divided into two special figure starting ports 232. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The general map display device 210, the first special map display device 212, and the second special map display device 214 correspond to an example of a notification unit. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form.

  In addition, the display area (here, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) and the decorative symbol display device 208 (symbol) of the general symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 (notification means). The display area of the decorative design display device 208 is larger than the display area of the display means (here, the size of the display screen is equivalent). Further, in this embodiment, the general symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 cannot display a moving image, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 A video can be displayed.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, two). The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. That is, it is a starting area where the ease of entry of game balls does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. It becomes possible to enter the ball. When the pair of blade members 2321 is closed (first state), the game ball is difficult to enter, and when the pair of blade members 2321 is open (second state), the game ball is easy to enter. . In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In other words, the variable winning opening 234 is from one of a predetermined first state (here, the closed state) and a second state (here, the open state) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first state. On the other hand, it is a variable winning means capable of changing the state. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 has a predetermined value. Opens and closes at predetermined intervals. It should be noted that the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game grade even if it is slightly opened. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238 and the like. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion and a forearm portion imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion at the shoulder position and the forearm at the elbow position. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the unit is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of symbol display means.

  In the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 3, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the gaming board 200, but the center of the gaming board 200 (for example, below the first special figure starting port 230). May be provided.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 (main control means) that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. In response, the first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the production, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 transmit A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to game ball payout according to a command to be performed, a launch control unit 630 that performs launch control of the game ball, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. It is composed by. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are: The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means (sub control means).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). 1), the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray 1082, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a drive circuit for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 24, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the high accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like. ing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined prize opening such as a general prize opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, a variable winning opening 234 or the like is won. And a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. The circuit 422, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, the effect button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. The unit sensor 425 is connected to a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from various sensors to the basic circuit 402.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and receives a prize based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 5A shows ten types of special drawings “special drawing A” to “special drawing J”. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of special figures. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, “Special figure C” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol (suddenly probable). When these symbols (special illustrations A, C, E) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure B” is a 15R big hit symbol (15R normal big hit), and “Special figure D” is a 7R big hit symbol (7R normal big hit). When the special figure B or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol (hidden probability variation). When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state.

  However, the control state of the normal figure high probability / low probability includes the control state when the winning is won (whether it was a special figure high probability state and whether it was a special figure high probability state), and the special figure symbol ( It depends on the stop symbol). For example, when the control state before starting the big hit game is a normal figure low probability state (regardless of the special figure state), "special figure A" to "special figure C" that shift to the common figure high probability state When it is stopped, after the big hit game is over, it shifts to the usual high probability state. The same applies when the control state before the big hit game is a normal high probability state. On the other hand, if the control state before the start of the big hit game is the normal figure high probability state, even if the “special drawing D” that becomes the low figure normal probability state is stopped, after the big hit game ends, the normal figure high probability state is entered. Return. In this case, although the big hit is usually drawn in a high probability state, the interest of the game is prevented from deteriorating by avoiding the disadvantage to the player. If the control state before the start of the big hit game is the special figure low probability state normal figure low probability state, if the "special figure D" is stopped, the normal figure low probability state will remain even after the big hit game ends. However, if “Special Figure D” is stopped in the special figure high probability state normal figure low probability state, the state shifts to the normal figure high probability state. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the “special drawing D” is a symbol that is not selected in the special drawing 2 that is mainly drawn in the ordinary high probability state.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 3 is represented, and the 15th round is defined as one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit or the short time big hit is the difference in the probability of winning the big hit (special big hit or short time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure low probability state is entered, and when the special figure A, special figure C, special figure E, and special figure F are won, the big hit is next. Until then, the special figure high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure B and special figure D are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game is finished is sometimes referred to as a special figure probability change. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

In addition, after the end of the big hit game of 15R, the end of the big hit game of 7R, and the end of the big hit game due to sudden probability change, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, 2 seconds open). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chow releases. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game.
This is because the game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls especially at 15R big hit, and if the winning of game balls to the variable winning opening 234 (Attacker) decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In this embodiment, when special figure A, special figure C, or special figure E is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. State) is maintained, and when special figure B or special figure D is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while special figure variation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. Shifts to the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (Special Figure F) is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance opening of the second special figure starting port 232 is maintained in a small size in the non-electric support state, but becomes a large size in the electric support state, and the entry rate of the game ball is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state or the first control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state or the second control state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In opening the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. As a result, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. The special figure G shown in FIG. 5A is the small hit symbol 1 and the special figure H is the small hit symbol 2. Any of the small winning symbols is a stop symbol mode in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as lost symbols. Special figure I is a losing symbol 1, and special figure J is a losing symbol 2.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot control state of the second advantage with a high player's advantage and the first advantage with a lower advantage than the second advantage. A non-hit control state is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 takes one of the control states of the big hit control state (second control state) and the non-hit control state (first control state). The main control unit 300 also performs the transition of these control states, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment also has symbols other than “Special Figure A” as a 15R special jackpot symbol. Other symbols such as a 15R normal jackpot 15R jackpot symbol and a 7R special jackpot symbol are also available. Is the same.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2. FIG. FIG. 5B shows seven types of special maps, “Special Figure A”, “Special Figure B”, “Special Figure E”, “Special Figure G” to “Special Figure J”. That is, in Special Figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A", "Special Figure B", and "Special Figure E") are prepared, which is the 7R jackpot symbol prepared in Special Figure 1. “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D” and “Special Figure F” which is a hidden probability change are not prepared. All of the three types of jackpot symbols in Special Figure 2 are jackpot symbols with probability variation and electric support. “Special Figure C”, Special Figure D ”, and“ Special Figure F ”are prepared as symbols, and“ Special Figure C ”has the same benefits as“ Special Figure A ”(with 15R probability change and electric support. "Special Figure D" is given the same benefit (with 7R power support) as "Special Figure D", and "Special Figure F" is the same benefit (2R) as "Special Figure E" You may make it give with a certain change and electric support.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot ("Special Figure A") or 7R special jackpot ("Special Figure C"), a combination of three decorative patterns with the same odd number in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (For example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed. The combination of these decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols with a jackpot fixed with probability change. Also, among these combinations of decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” or “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”) in which 3 or 7 ornamental symbols are arranged side by side. , A combination of the 15R special jackpot-decorated decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed only when the 15R special jackpot is “Special Figure A”. Further, when notifying 7R special big hit ("Special Figure C"), 15R normal big hit ("Special Figure B"), or 7R normal big hit ("Special Figure D"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. , A combination of three decorative symbols having the same even number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” or “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. When these same and even combinations of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of 15R special big hit. In addition, when a sudden probability change ("Special Figure E"), hidden probability change ("Special Figure F"), or a small hit ("Special Figure G", "Special Figure H"), which is a big hit of 2R, is notified. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of a decoration symbol such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” or a combination of ornament symbols such as “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” and a combination of ornamental symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5” may be referred to as chance eyes. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol J, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described above (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped. As will be described in detail later, in some gaming states, 2R is a big hit, sudden probability change ("Special Figure E"), hidden probability change ("Special Figure F"), or small hit symbol ("Special Figure G") ”,“ Special Illustration H ”), the same combination as the combination of decorative symbols in the case of notifying a lost symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative display of decorative symbol” until the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”) is stopped is displayed. Sometimes referred to as variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  As described above, the symbols are displayed in the symbol pattern display areas 208a to 208c on the left, middle, and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the stop symbol mode (see FIGS. 5A and 5B) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 described above. The decorative pattern (see (c)) of the decorative pattern (see (c)) of one decorative pattern is larger.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect). In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 has a special jackpot special random number counter, a small bonus special figure 1 random counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for these counters for the special figure 2. Is provided. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time first determination random number value and the special figure fluctuation time second determination random value. Further, in the RAM 308, the number of holdings of special figure 1, special figure 1 winning random value, special figure 1 random value for big hit, special figure 1 random value for small hit, special figure 1 random value for lose, special figure 1 success / failure The determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, the special figure 1 variation time, and the retention number, random value, and result for special figure 2 are stored. In addition, the RAM 308 has separate storage units that are divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery), separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Yes. As will be described later, the special-purpose 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure, as will be described later, One random number value for determining one variation time is set as one set, and the five random number values are stored for each area in a winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit of FIG. 2 includes a special figure 2 winning random value, a special bonus 2 special value, a special 2 random value, a special 2 random value, and a special 2 fluctuation time. The five random number values for determination are set as one set, and these five random number values are stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power management unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter, a special figure changing time determining random value, and a normal figure changing period determining random value respectively The two random number counters for generating are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. . At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (here, about once every 4 ms). The main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed (in this case, so as not to detect a processing abnormality) so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds an initial setting value (32.8 ms in this case) and a WDT interrupt does not occur. Restart once about every 2ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice after the absence of the detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (here, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (here, no detection signal before, detection signal last time, detection signal this time). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first special drawing starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232, or the variable winning winning port 234, It is determined that In other words, it is determined that there has been a prize at these winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 228, 230 and 232. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (here, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the time for displaying a symbol on the general symbol display device 210 is displayed, and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 is counted. Various timers are updated, including a special figure display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 228, 230, 232 have been won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), a predetermined Get startup information. That is, if the number of holdings is less than a predetermined number, special figure 1 winning random number value, big hit special figure 1 random value, small hit special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time Get random number for decision. The special figure 1 winning random value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are derived from a software random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information, and start information deriving means This corresponds to an example of (first start information deriving means, second start information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. The The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area shown in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. As for special figure 2, each random value which is starting information is acquired similarly to special figure 1, and the acquired random number value is similarly stored as a set of starting information in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. In addition, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area shown in FIG.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the general map start opening 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (2 in the present embodiment), the general map at that timing is used. The value of the random number counter for generating the winning random number is acquired as the general winning random number that is the starting information, and is stored in the normal holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. In this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port 234. In such a case, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the winnings of the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. ) Is set to receive winning information.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer prepared in the RAM 308 is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on and off. Repeated lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 stops the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbols that are stopped and displayed are determined and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, a signal to be held is output and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and the valve is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is a loss, the usual figure loss flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in the step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, the normal / unusual determination is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a normal-use determination table.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating a low probability table for determining whether or not a normal figure is reached, and FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating a high probability table for determining whether or not a normal figure is appropriate.

  In the normal hit determination, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is turned off (if it is in a non-electric support state), whether or not the normal time is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. If the flag is turned on (if it is in the electric support state), whether or not normal is determined is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. The determination of whether or not a normal figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a normal figure winning taken out from the reserved storage unit for the normal figure in the RAM 308 (possible range is 0 to 65535). The conventional Atari probability is 1 / 100.7 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 8 (a) and 1 / 1.0003 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 8 (b). is there. Here, deriving “winning” or “losing” corresponds to the normal-winning determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the normal-winning determination corresponds to an example of the first win / fail determination means. To do.

  In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the case of winning in the normal / unusual determination, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of loss, the hit flag is set to OFF. Next, the normal time change display time is stored in a normal time change time storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  FIG. 8 (c) is a table showing the normal fluctuation time.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a universal display symbol update timer. If the time flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets a variation time of 5 seconds for the normal symbol display symbol update timer regardless of the result of the normal symbol determination. Set. On the other hand, if the hourly flag is turned on (if it is in the electric support state), a fluctuation time of 1 second is set in the normal figure display symbol update timer regardless of the result of the normal figure success / failure determination. FIG. 8C also shows an opening / closing pattern of the blade member 2321 (electrical chew) of the second special figure starting port 232 after the notification of the normal / unusual determination result. When the result of the normal / unusual determination is off, the blade member 2321 does not open and remains closed. On the other hand, if the result of the normal / unusual determination is successful, the blade member 2321 is opened only once for 0.3 seconds in the non-electric support state, and is opened three times for 1.8 seconds in the electric support state. . In this case, the time interval between the opening and the opening (closing time) is 0.5 seconds. That is, the electric chew operation time in the electric support state is 1.8 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.8 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.8 seconds + 0.5 seconds = 6.4 seconds.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine as described with reference to FIG. 3 and should be right-handed in the electric support state and left-handed in the non-electric support state (normal state). It is. As described above, in the non-electric support state, the hit probability in determining whether or not to determine the normal figure is 1 / 100.7, and the electric chew release time is 0.3 seconds. Therefore, the non-electric support state (normal state) is assumed. Even if a right turn is made, it is almost impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as a left turn at the time of non-electric support.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls for entering the second special figure starting port 232 is one.

  Following the general drawing-related lottery process, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure prefetching process.

  In this special figure prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings of special figure 2 has increased from the prefetching process executed last time (step S251). That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). Compare the special figure 2 hold number at the time of executing the current prefetch process after the winning acceptance process (step S217) and the old special figure 2 hold number, and determine whether or not the hold number of the special figure 2 has increased. judge. If the special figure 2 holding number has not increased, the process proceeds to step S254. On the other hand, if the number of holdings in the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S252.

  In step S252, first, the increment of the special figure 2 winning random number value in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. In step S252, when the pre-reading of the special figure 2 winning random value is completed, it is determined whether the pre-reading special figure 2 winning random value belongs to which random number range in the success / failure determination table. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, and in the case of a special figure low probability state, if the pre-read special figure 2 winning random number value is within a predetermined numerical range, the success / failure determination result is “big hit”. Prior determination is made. Otherwise, the determination result is determined as “losing” in advance. Even in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variation game is performed again using the same determination / non-permission determination table, and the determination result here is only in advance It is a result of the determination.

  In step S 252, if the result of prior determination is “big hit”, the big hit special figure 2 random number value in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched. When the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure 2 random number value for small hits in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched. When the determination result is “losing”, the special figure 2 random value for losing in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure 2 preliminary determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure 2 preliminary determination table, random number ranges corresponding to each of the seven types of stop symbol forms shown in FIG. 5B are defined. In step S252, the special figure 2 preliminary determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5B is stopped and displayed) depends on which random number range the various pre-read special figure 2 random numbers belong to. obtain. Note that the determination result of the special figure 2 here is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure 2 is again performed in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch result storage unit that is divided into areas for each hold. In step S253 following step S252 shown in FIG. 8, information representing the special figure 1 pre-determination result (which is also information representing special figure 1 and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in the prefetch information temporary storage unit of special figure 1. , Store in the corresponding reserved area.

  FIG. 10A shows an example in which the prefetch information of the special figure 1 is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch information temporary storage section, and FIG. 10B shows a special figure 2 prefetch information temporary storage section. 2 shows an example in which the prefetch information in FIG. 2 is stored, and FIG. 2C shows an example in which the prefetch information in FIG. 1 is stored in the prefetch information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support.

  The pre-read information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 shown in FIG. 10 (a) holds the oldest (the latest timing of winning a prize to the first special figure starting port 230) among special FIG. Pre-read information corresponding to the first hold (1), the pre-read information 2 corresponding to the second oldest hold (second hold in Fig. 1), and the newest hold (fourth hold in Fig. 1) Each of the prefetch information 4 stores the prefetch information of the special figure I which is the first off symbol, and the prefetch information 3 corresponding to the second new hold (the third hold of the special figure 1) includes the 15R special Prefetch information of special figure A which is a big hit symbol is stored.

  In step S254 subsequent to step S253 shown in FIG. 8, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings in FIG. That is, similar to step S251 for special figure 2, this time, the process for special figure 1 is performed. If the special figure 1 holding number has not increased, the prefetching process ends. On the other hand, if the number of holdings in FIG. 2 has increased, it is determined whether or not the current control state is the non-electric support state (the time flag is off) (step S255). If it is in the electric support state, as in step S252 for special figure 2, the increased start information of special figure 1 is pre-read and the stop symbol of special figure 1 is determined in advance (step S256). Next, as in step S253 for special figure 2, information representing the special figure 2 preliminary determination result (which is also information representing special figure 2 and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in the prefetch information temporary storage unit of special figure 2. Then, the data is stored in the corresponding reserved area (step S257), and the prefetching process ends. In the special figure 2 pre-read information temporary storage unit shown in FIG. 10B, the oldest of the special figure 2 holdings (the timing when the winning timing to the second special figure starting port 232 is the latest) is held (special figure). Only the prefetch information 2 corresponding to the first hold of 2) stores the prefetch information of the special figure I which is the first off symbol, and the remaining prefetch information stores information indicating “none”. Yes. This information is information indicating that there is no hold, that is, the number of holds is not increasing, and is information stored by default.

  In addition, in the non-electric support state, pre-reading and pre-determination of the start information of the special figure 1 are not performed, and in these cases, the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the pre-read start information of the special figure 1 is performed. “Undetermined” information indicating the absence is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit (step S258), and the prefetch process is terminated. That is, based on the fact that the ball enters the starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (the first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region), the starting information acquired during the electric support is The prior determination based on this is not performed, and the prior determination result is not notified. By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In the present embodiment, the start information itself is not pre-read, but it may be a mode in which pre-read is performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification are not performed. In addition, the pre-reading and the prior determination may be performed, but the prior determination result may not be notified. Furthermore, an aspect in which execution determination as to whether or not to notify the prior determination result is not performed, or an aspect in which “not executed” is always determined in the execution determination may be employed. Further, even in the case of a big hit game, “undecided” information may be stored in the same manner. “Undetermined” information is stored in the prefetch information 1 of the prefetch information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 in the power support state shown in FIG.

  The pre-reading of the starting information and the pre-determination using the pre-reading starting information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) in the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process described later is performed. Is. That is, it is executed before the symbol variation display based on the start information is started. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 winning random value and various special figure 1 random values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means, and displays the special figure 2 winning random value and various special figure 2 random values. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads corresponds to an example of second start information pre-reading means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 winning random number value and various special figure 1 random number values corresponds to an example of the first pre-determining means. The special control 2 based on the special figure 2 random number value is equivalent to an example of the second prior determination means.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225), Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). The special figure 2 state update process performs the process described below in accordance with the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer prepared in the RAM 308 is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is displayed. Turn on / off drive control that repeats turning on and off. By performing this control, the second special figure display device 214 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation display (special figure 2 fluctuation game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lose flag, a second lose flag, a probability change flag, and a time reduction flag. Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to represent. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs stop display of any one of the stop symbol aspects of the special symbol pattern 2 shown in FIG. 5B. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the special figure 2 that is stopped and displayed is confirmed and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is turned off during the big hit game or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (second control state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  The door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, you may make it display the image which alert | reports to a player that the big hit by the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is complete | finished. When the end effect is performed, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for that period.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores an opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing pattern according to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful. To get.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable prize opening opening / closing pattern table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the case of 15R big hit (Special Figure A, Special Figure B), the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 opens 15 times. In 7R big hit (special drawing C, special drawing D), the door member 2341 (attacker) of the variable winning opening 234 is opened seven times. Whether it is a big hit of 15R or a big hit of 7R, the maximum opening time of one time is 29 seconds, and the time interval (closing time) between opening and opening is 1.5 seconds.

  In the case of 2R big hit (special figure E, special figure F) or small hit (special figure G, special figure H), the door member 2341 (attacker) of the variable winning opening 234 is opened twice. The maximum opening time of one time is 0.3 seconds, and the time interval (closing time) between opening and opening is 0.5 seconds. That is, the opening time is shorter than the closing time and shorter than the game ball firing interval by the launching device 110.

  In a big hit game, if a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are entered during one round, the door member 2341 is closed even before the maximum opening time has elapsed. On the other hand, in the small hit game, if the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first release, the second release is not performed.

  Therefore, the attacker operation time at the time of 2R big hit or small hit is 0.3 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 0.3 seconds = 1.1 seconds at the maximum. As described with reference to FIG. 8C, the electric chew operation time in the electric support state is 6, 4 seconds, which is significantly longer than the attacker operation time. In addition, the single opening time (1.8 seconds) of the electric Chu during the electric support state is significantly longer than the single opening time (0.3 seconds) of the attacker.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process (step S225), the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, Set the hourly flag on. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag when the special figure determination result is “special figure A”, “special figure C”, or “special figure E” in the special figure lottery process described later. Set both to on. When the special figure determination result is “special figure F”, only the probability variation flag of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag is set to ON. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high (a special figure high probability state). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the determination of success / failure (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state, the electric chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of times of opening based on one hit is large. The variable starting area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, if the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is in a non-electric support state, and the variable start area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time reduction flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time reduction flag corresponds to an example of game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control information determination means.

  In addition, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of a second win / fail determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate. That is, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs special figure 2 priority fluctuation, and the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure start port 232 (determination of special figure 2) is determined as the first special figure start. This is prioritized over a lottery based on winning a prize in the mouth 230 (a determination of success / failure in FIG. 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display means capable of executing at least the first symbol variation display, the second symbol display means capable of executing at least the second symbol variation display, And a control means capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means, wherein the control means is capable of at least controlling the second symbol display means. When the first hold condition is satisfied, at least control for holding the start of the first symbol variation display can be executed, and the control means satisfies the second hold condition. In the case where the first symbol variation display is suspended, the control means can execute at least the first symbol when the first suspended digestion condition is satisfied. The variable display starts The control means is capable of at least executing control for starting the second symbol variation display when the second reserved digest condition is established, The establishment requirement of the second suspended digestion condition is a requirement including at least that the start of the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first retained digestion condition is the second The requirement that at least the start of the symbol variation display is not suspended is a requirement, and the requirement to establish the first suspended digestion condition is a requirement that at least includes that the start of the first symbol variation display is suspended. is there. It should be noted that the special figure 2 related lottery process is performed first after the special figure 2 state update process of step S225, and then the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 is performed, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. It may be.

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is executed (lottery), determination of the special figure to be stopped, and determination of the variation time are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. That is, the CPU 304 that can execute at least both of the big hit determination and the symbol lottery corresponds to an example of the success / failure determination means. In the special figure 2 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this determination, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying the special figure variation or the stop display, and if any one is being displayed, the main controller timer interrupt processing is performed. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt Returning to the process, if the special figure is not in operation, it is determined that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. The determination as to whether or not the game is successful is determined by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable game held is larger than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the start information stored most recently from the holding storage unit of FIG. Random values for the set (Special Figure 2 Winning Random Value, Special Bonus Figure 2 Random Value, Small Bonus Special Figure 2 Random Value, Loss Special Figure 2 Random Value, and Special Figure 2 Variation Time Random Value) The start information (a set of random values) that is acquired and still stored in the hold storage unit is transferred from the area currently stored to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values (special figure 2 winning random number value, big hit special figure 2 random value, small hit special figure 2 random value, lost special figure 2 random value, The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the process of acquiring the special figure 2 variable time determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 12A is a view showing a high probability table for determination of success / failure, and FIG. 12B is a view showing a low probability table for determination of success / failure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state is obtained. Based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 12 (a) belongs to the numerical value range 0 to 65535), the special figure 2 success / failure determination results are “big hit” and “small hit”. Or, “losing” is derived. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state, so that the special figure 2 winning random number value belongs to which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Then, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” is derived as the special figure 2 determination result. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” corresponds to determination of success / failure.

  In this embodiment, the big hit probability is 1/300 in the special figure low probability state, whereas it is 1/40 in the special figure high probability state.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 2 is determined based on the special figure 2 determination result.

  FIG. 12C is a diagram showing the special figure 2 determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure 2 determination table, a random number range corresponding to the special symbol stop pattern (see FIG. 5B) is defined for each of the determination results.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the special figure 2 determination result is a big hit, the special figure 2 random number value for big hit (taken out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. The numerical value range to be obtained is 0 to 99), and it is determined which random number range of the jackpot the result of determination in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. "Special Figure A" or "Special Figure B" or "Special Figure E" is determined. Also, if the special figure 2 win / fail determination result is a small hit, the special figure 2 random number value for small hits (a possible numerical range is one of the random values for one set previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308) 0 to 99) determines which random number range of the small hits the result of determination of the success / failure in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. Determine "G" or "Special Figure H". Furthermore, if the special figure 2 determination result is a loss, the special figure 2 random number value for lost out of one set of random values previously obtained from the storage unit of the RAM 308 (possible numerical range is 0 to 99) determines which random number range of the losing decision results in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 10C, and the special figure 2 determination result is “special figure I”. Alternatively, “special drawing J” is determined. The special figure 2 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol form of special figure 2 to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation time (special diagram 2 variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined based on the special diagram 2 determination result. For the determination of the variation time here, a special figure 2 variation time determination random value (a possible numerical range is 0 to 65535) out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is used. It is done.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a special figure 2 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 2 variation time determination table is composed of tables 5-12. In each of these tables, the correspondence between the variation time and the random number selection range of the special figure 2 variation time determination random value is defined. In addition, in each table shown in FIG. 13, the name of the variation pattern representing the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to each variation time is also shown for reference. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one. The main control unit 300 may determine the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time of the special figure, but in the present embodiment, information representing the variation time determined here is the first sub-information. It transmits to the control part 400, and the 1st sub control part 400 determines the production | presentation aspect in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 corresponding to change time. The variation patterns in the present embodiment include a variation pattern with a reach effect and a change pattern without a reach effect. In the present embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are displayed in the same manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is stopped. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (the symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the predetermined jackpot symbol This is a state in which a combination (for example, “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  Super Reach A (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “reach A”) and Super Reach B (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “reach B”) are produced by adding special variation display to normal reach. It is a kind of reach that improves the effect.

  In addition, long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, and the like are known as super reach, and special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is an effect of notifying the player after the success / failure determination and notifying the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the special determination's success / failure determination (lottery) will be the winning determination result. Thus, whether or not to perform reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach.

  Tables 5 to 7 are tables used when the special figure 2 determination results are special figures A and B (second specific success / failure determination results) that are jackpot symbols of 15R. The table 5 is used in the low-probability state (non-electric support state), and the table 6 is in the high-probability state (electric support state) and when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 1 to 3. The table 7 is used when the usual figure high probability state (electric support state) and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is zero. In the case of a normal figure high probability state (electric support state) and there is a special figure 2 hold, a high-speed fluctuation time of 1 second may be selected. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 has no reach. The fluctuation pattern per sudden occurrence is executed.

  Tables 8 and 9 are tables used when the special figure 2 determination result is the special figure E which is the 2R big hit symbol of sudden probability change or the special figures G and H which are the small hit symbols. Table 8 is used when the normal figure high probability state (electric support state) and the special figure high probability state (probability variation state) and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 1 to 3, and table 9 is Used except for being used. That is, the table 9 is used when the normal figure high probability state (electric support state) and the special figure high probability state (probability variation state) and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is zero. Moreover, it is used also in the normal low probability state (non-electric support state) regardless of the probability variation state and the number of holds in the special figure 2. Furthermore, regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 2, it is also used in a normal figure high probability state (electric support state) and a special figure low probability state (non-probability variation state).

  In Table 8, a high-speed fluctuation time of 1 second is always selected, and the decorative symbol display device 208 executes a fluctuation pattern of ultra-short fluctuation without reach. The state in which the table 8 is used is a probability variation state, and if the special figure 2 determination result is a sudden probability variation special figure E, the special figure 2 determination result is a small bonus special figure G even after the big hit game ends. , H, there is no change in the control state before and after the big hit game, and therefore the probability change state is entered even after the big hit game ends. For this reason, there is little need to hit the player, and in this embodiment, the variation time is short. Therefore, when the table 8 is used, the special figure variation time is 1 second, and the jackpot game time is 1.1 seconds as described with reference to FIG. become. On the other hand, the electric chew operation time in the electric support state is 6, 4 seconds, which is sufficiently longer than 2.1 seconds, and the electric chew operation easily crosses big hit games and small hit games. That is, it is possible to execute the symbol variation display and the paka-paka game shown in FIG. 2 when entering the ball while the electric chew is released while the electric chew is being operated. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the player is successful during the big hit game or the small hit game that is in the non-electric support state.

  Further, in Table 9, a 12-second variation time is always selected, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3”, which is stopped and displayed after fluctuation without reach, or A so-called chance change is performed in which a combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5” is temporarily turned off. Since the state in which the table 9 is used may be an uncertain change state, the player is scolded by a somewhat long change time (here, 12 seconds). In other words, if it is a low-probability state (non-electric support state), winning to the second special figure starting port 232 will be a very rare winning, and in the sense of expecting a big hit with probability variation, A relatively long variation time is always selected. In addition, regardless of the number of holds in the special figure 2, even if it is in a high probability state (electric support state) and a special figure low probability state (non-probability change state), it means that it will be a big hit with probability change. A certain long variation time is always selected. In addition, when the figure is in a high probability state (electric support state) and a special figure high probability state (probability variation state) and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0, the special figure 2 is digested in 1 second (high-speed fluctuation). Then, even if it is a special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine, since there is a possibility that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 may be performed, a certain long fluctuation time is always selected.

  Tables 10 to 12 are tables used when the special figure 2 determination result is special figures I and J which are out-of-band designs. The table 10 is used when the usual figure high probability state (electric support state) and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1 to 3, and the table 11 is the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). This is used when the number of holds in FIG. 1 is zero. On the other hand, the table 12 is used in the usual low probability state (non-electric support state) regardless of the number of holdings in FIG.

  In the special figure 2 variation time determination table described above, a long variation time of 60 seconds or more is not selected as an improvement in the digestion efficiency of the hold during the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). Moreover, if the normal reach is reached during the normal high probability state (electric support state), the jackpot is determined.

  The process for determining the special figure 2 fluctuation time will be described later in detail, but here, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is determined, and the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) ends.

  Subsequently, special drawing 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is read as “special figure 1”. That is, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, one set of random values (the special figure 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 of the RAM 308) , Special figure 1 random value for losing, and random number value for determining special figure 1 variation time) are obtained, and based on one set of random values (starting information), whether or not to determine whether or not special figure 1 is true (lottery) Determines the special figure to be executed and stopped, and the change time. The execution determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, and the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. 12D is used to determine the special figure. .

  The probability of winning the 15R special jackpot is 60% in the special figure 2 as shown in FIG. 12 (c), whereas it is 25% in the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 12 (d). In addition, the probability of winning 15R jackpot is 30% in the special figure 2, whereas it is 10% in the special figure 1. Further, the probability of winning 2R jackpot is 5% in the special figure 2, whereas it is 10% in the special figure 1. In FIG. 1, the probability of winning the 7R special jackpot is the highest, 30%. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player who has won the second special figure starting port 232 has a chance to win more balls than the first special figure starting port 230. More and more advantageous.

  In addition, the change time determination table shown in FIG. 14 is used to determine the change time in FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special figure 1 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 1 variable time determination table is composed of tables 1 to 4. Table 1 has a special figure 1 decision result of 15R jackpot symbol (special chart A, B) or 7R jackpot symbol (special chart). C, D) is a table that is used regardless of whether or not it is in the electric support state, and is the same as the content of the table 5 shown in FIG. Table 2 is a table that is used regardless of whether it is in the electric support state or not when the special figure 1 determination result is a 2R jackpot symbol (special symbols E, F) or a small hit symbol (special symbols G, H). Yes, the content is the same as the content of the table 9 shown in FIG.

  Tables 3 and 4 are tables used when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J). When the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of holds in special figure 1.

  When the determination result of the special figure 1 is a losing symbol (special figures I and J), the non-electric support state and the holding number of the special figure 1 is 3, the table 3 is used. In this case, in order to expedite digestion of the special figure 1, there is a high probability that a short variation time of 3 seconds is selected, and when the variation time of 3 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect. Instead, a shortened change will be made.

  When special figure 1 decision result is losing design (special figure I, J) and non-electric support state and special figure 1 hold number is 0-2 or electric support state (the hold number is irrelevant) For this, Table 4 is used. This table 4 has the same contents as the contents of the table 12 shown in FIG.

  Here, the processing for determining the special figure 1 fluctuation time and the special figure 2 fluctuation time will be described in detail.

  In the variation time determination process, it is first determined whether or not to determine the variation time of the special figure 1 based on whether the special figure 1 determination result is derived or the special figure 2 determination result is derived. If the special figure 1 determination result is derived, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 determination result is a symbol other than a loss (big hit symbol or small hit symbol).

  If it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, it is determined whether the special figure 1 determination result is a special figure A or a special figure B (15R big hit symbol). If it is a 15R jackpot symbol, the table 1 shown in FIG. 14 is selected. On the other hand, if the determination result of special figure 1 is other than special figure A or special figure B, table 2 shown in FIG. 14 is selected.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the special figure 1 is an outlier symbol (special figure I or J), it is determined whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. 14 is selected. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, the table 3 or 4 is selected according to the number of reservations in the current special figure 1.

  If the special figure 2 decision result is derived, it is determined whether the special figure 2 decision result is a symbol other than a loss (big hit symbol or small hit symbol), and it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol In this case, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 determination result is special figure A or special figure B (15R big hit symbol). If it is not a big hit symbol of 15R, it is determined whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If it is the electric support state, it is determined whether or not the current control state is a probabilistic state. If it is a certain change state, the table 8 or 9 shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is in a non-electric support state or an indeterminate change state, the table 9 is selected.

  Further, if the special figure 2 determination result is special figure A or special figure B, it is determined whether or not the current control state is the electric support state, and if it is the electric support state, the current special figure 2 is suspended. Table 6 or 7 is selected according to the number. As a result, a sudden 15R big hit (a big hit with a fluctuation time of 1 second in the table 6) occurs only when there is an electric support state and there is the number of holdings shown in FIG. On the contrary, if it is in the non-electric support state, the table 5 is selected (step S518), and the process proceeds to step S505.

  Further, if the determination result of the special figure 2 is an outlier symbol (special figure I or J), it is determined whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. The table 10 or 11 is selected according to the number of reservations. On the contrary, if it is in the non-electric support state, the table 12 is selected.

  Based on the table selected as described above, the variation time is selected by lottery, the special figure variation time is determined, and the variation time determination process ends. In this lottery, as described above, the lottery is performed using the special figure variation time determination random value. A value representing the special figure variation time determined here is set in a special figure display symbol update timer prepared in the RAM 308.

  In step S233 performed following the special figure 1 related lottery process in step S231 shown in FIG. 7, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure. Bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above.

  If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state, information indicating a special symbol variation time, and the like. The information representing the control state included in the symbol variation start command is information based on the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag.

  If the command type is a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. If there is, the information including the control state is included, and in the case of the per round number designation command, the information indicating the control state, the per round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing the control state, and information representing the special figure variation time stored in the RAM 308 as command data. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is on hold is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command displays an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Let the jackpot game start.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the end effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to end, for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and The game ends.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held. Information indicating the number of games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. This general command special figure pending increase processing is step S215 in the same timer interruption processing as the timer interruption processing of the winning acceptance processing that acquired the starting information when the starting information was acquired in the previous winning acceptance processing (step S217). Is executed. In the general command special figure hold increasing process, the special figure identification information (information shown in FIG. 1 or 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is added to the command data of the special figure hold increasing command, and the control state is set. Information to be displayed and information of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance are set.

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, an external output signal setting process (step S235) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step 205 are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored. When the lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the normal symbol display device 210, the first symbol is displayed via the driving circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the 15R or 7R jackpot game, the variable winning opening 234 is opened longer (see FIG. 11), and the jackpot game period becomes longer. On the other hand, in the 2R big hit or small win, the variable winning opening 234 is opened only for a very short time (see FIG. 11), and the big hit game period and the small hit game period are quickly ended. Hereinafter, a big hit game in which the variable winning opening 234 is opened for a long time is referred to as a packer game, and a big hit game or a small hit game in which the variable winning opening 234 is opened for a very short time may be referred to as a pakapaka game.

  The electric chew operation time during the electric support state is 6.4 seconds (see FIG. 8C). On the other hand, the time from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the special figure E, G, H is stopped and displayed to the end of the pakapaka game when the special figure E2 is held in the electric support state and the probability change state. Is 1000 ms (special figure 2 fluctuation time) +300 ms (attacker first opening time: see FIG. 11) +500 ms (attacker closing time) +300 ms (attacker second opening time) = 2.1 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is difficult for the electric chew to finish the operation during the Paka Paka game (non-electric support state). In other words, it is designed so that it is difficult to determine whether or not it is normal during the Paka Paka game (non-electric support state).

  In addition, if the transition from the electric support state to the Pakapaka game has changed to the non-electric support state, the timing of the map change may start or the packer with the electric support will start. If the base map change display starts near the end of the game, the base map change game in the non-electric support state will be performed immediately after the big hit game or the small hit game ends and shifts to the electric support state. There may be. However, in the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation time is 5 seconds in the non-electric support state (see FIG. 8C). Further, the fluctuation display time in the special figure 2 is often a shortened fluctuation of 7 seconds if there is no hold (see the table 11 shown in FIG. 13). That is, when one special figure 2 hold remains, and the big hit game ends and the hold is consumed, the special figure shortening variation of 7 seconds is performed. In this 7 seconds, the fluctuation of the usual figure for 5 seconds is finished, and in the state where the big hit game is finished and the state is shifted to the electric support state, the electric chew is almost released in the judgment of whether or not the common figure is won. 2 variable games are started, and the variable game of FIG. 1 is difficult to start.

  Note that the sudden change (see table 6 shown in FIG. 13) and super-shortening fluctuation (see table 6 shown in FIG. 13), which are high-speed fluctuations of 1 second, are not selected when the hold in FIG. 2 is 0. In the electric support state, since the suspension of the special figure 2 is almost accumulated before the big hit game is started, the variable game of the special figure 1 is hardly started in the state where the big hit game is finished and the electric support state is entered. .

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. This effect control process will be described in more detail later.

  In step S311, when the press of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the drive circuit 422 of the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read out in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S318, information display control processing for displaying access information (for example, two-dimensional code, color code, URL), option menu, and user menu is performed. The information display control process will be described later in detail.

  In step S319, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S309, a setting is made to output this control command.

  Subsequently, an original mode control process is performed (step S321), and the process returns to step S303. The original mode control process (step S321) will be described later.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to set an original (Daitomo) mode. Note that an original mode selection switch that switches between enabling and disabling the original mode may be provided in the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. The original mode selection switch is operated by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100 when the pachinko machine 100 is shipped from the factory, or operated by a store clerk of the store where the pachinko machine is installed. The original mode selection switch may be disabled after shipment by, for example, caulking a portion of the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 where the original mode selection switch is provided at the time of shipment. That is, since the original mode selection switch cannot be operated by the player, it is preferable that the original mode selection switch is configured to be operated only by a limited number of people such as a manufacturer's person or a store clerk.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the original mode.

  In the original mode, the game machine is capable of setting the original mode, and history information on the result of playing the game with the original mode set is stored in the game machine. At the game stand, various privileges (for example, an effect with a low appearance rate and an effect indicating information related to the profit of the game) according to the history information are given. When the game in which the original mode is set is to be ended, individual setting information, which is individual personal information of the player, including history information stored in the game table is input to the server. Each time a game in which the original mode is set is finished, individual setting information including new history information reflecting the history of the game is issued from the gaming table. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. When the individual setting information stored in the server is input to the game machine when the next game is played, a privilege according to the history information included in the input individual setting information is also provided at the next game. This individual setting information is included in an encrypted password having a predetermined number of digits, and is exchanged between the game console-player (external device apparatus) -server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine stores a corresponding model code. In specifications where history information can be used in common between different models, there are multiple corresponding model codes. In specifications where history information can be used only between the same models, there is only one corresponding model code. .

  FIG. 16 shows the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 which is a kind of gaming machine, and a server S operated by a gaming machine manufacturer. The server S and the pachinko machine 100 are connected via a communication network N. The communication network N here is the Internet, but may be a network constructed by the TCP / IP protocol, for example, a LAN (Local Area Network). Accordingly, the server S and the pachinko machine 100 may be connected indoors with a LAN cable. In this case, the server S may be a hall computer of a hall where the pachinko machine 100 is installed. Furthermore, the server function may be built in the pachinko machine 100.

  FIG. 16 shows an enlarged view of the operation key unit 190 in a circle. The operation key unit 190 includes a cross key 191, an OK button 192, and a cancel button 193. In the original mode, the operation key unit 190 and the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 1 are operated to proceed with registration and processing.

  Further, FIG. 16 also shows a mobile phone terminal M as an example of an external device having a communication function and an image reading function. The external device may be a smartphone. A cellular phone terminal M shown in FIG. 16 has a camera function and a barcode reader function. When the mobile phone terminal M captures a two-dimensional code using the camera function, the code reader function is activated and character information included in the two-dimensional code is extracted. Further, the mobile phone terminal M is a communication terminal that can access a web page (web page) by a protocol of HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol). In the following description, the term “Web page” refers to a page that complies with the HTTP protocol. A communication network N shown in FIG. 16 is also connected to a server or the like provided by a mobile phone terminal operator or the like not shown here, and the server S and the mobile phone terminal M communicate data via the communication network N. Can send and receive.

  Further, FIG. 16 also shows a slot machine 900 as a game table. The slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 16 is also a game machine that can set the original mode.

  The server S is provided with a web page, such as an initial registration page for member registration, a password issuance page, an update reception page, and a customization page. The server S corresponds to an example of an external storage device, and stores and manages member individual setting information (history information).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the information display control process (step S318) shown in FIG.

  In this information display control process, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration screen is being displayed (step S3181). If the display is being performed, the game is not being performed. (Step S3182) is executed, and this information display control process ends. On the other hand, if the demo screen is not displayed, it means that the game is in progress, and an access information control process (step S3183) to be described later is executed in detail, and this information display control process ends. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, two types of options menu display and access information display are prepared, but only one of them may be prepared.

  FIG. 18A is a flowchart of the option menu control process (step S3182) shown in FIG.

  In the option menu control process, it is first determined whether or not it is the display timing of the option menu (step S3182a). The display timing may be a predetermined time or more after the demonstration screen is displayed. If it is not the display timing, this option menu control process ends, and if it is the display timing, it is determined whether or not the first condition is satisfied (step S3182b). This first condition (corresponding to an example of a specific condition) is established when the effect button 136 is not pressed. If this specific condition is satisfied, the option menu control process ends. That is, the option menu is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, if the specific condition is not satisfied (if the effect button 136 is pressed), a control command for displaying the initial screen of the option menu is set in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the RAM 408 (step S3182c). The option menu control process ends. The control command set here is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 15A, and an initial screen of the option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done.

  FIG. 18B is a modification of the option menu control process shown in FIG.

  The option menu is displayed only from the state where the demonstration screen is displayed. Here, it is first determined whether or not the player has performed an operation (step S3182s). For example, it is determined whether or not the effect button 136 or the OK button 192 is pressed during the demonstration screen display. This determination is made based on whether or not the effect button sensor 426 shown in FIG. 4 or the operation key unit sensor 425 has detected an operation.

  If no operation is performed by the player, the option menu control process ends. On the other hand, if an operation by the player has been performed, it is determined whether or not the operation was within the operation acceptance valid period (step S3182t). The operation acceptance valid period is an example of the third condition. Note that the reverse of the first condition in step S3182b in FIG. 18A corresponds to the third condition. If the operation reception valid period is in effect, a control command for displaying the initial screen of the option menu is set in the RAM 408 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S3182u), and this option menu control process ends. On the other hand, if it is not during the operation acceptance valid period, the option menu control process ends, and the option menu is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 18C is a time chart showing the relationship between the option menu display screen and the demo screen.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 18C, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  In the state in which the demo screen is being displayed, at the timing shown in FIG. 18C, the player operation is performed after the predetermined time described in step S3182a has elapsed from the demonstration screen display. Alternatively, the timing of “a” is within the operation reception valid period described in step S3182t, and the player operation is performed at the timing of “a”.

  Then, the demo screen is switched to an option menu display screen for displaying information to be provided to the player. It should be noted that when a predetermined period elapses after the demonstration screen is displayed, the demonstration screen may be switched to the option menu display screen regardless of whether or not a player operation is performed.

  The timing of a shown in FIG. 18C is the timing when the first elapsed period has ended after the option menu display is started. In this time chart, the player operation ( For example, the presentation button 136 or the OK button 192 is not pressed), and the option menu display screen is switched to a demonstration screen that does not display information to be provided to the player. That the player operation is not performed within the first elapsed period corresponds to an example of the specific condition.

  In the example of the time chart shown in FIG. 18C, a player operation (for example, pressing of the effect button 136 or the OK button 192) is performed during the second elapsed period after switching from the option menu display screen to the demo screen. The option menu display screen is not displayed even if it is disconnected. That is, the second elapsed period is an option menu display disabled period. Eventually, when the second elapsed period ends and a player operation is performed, the option menu display screen is displayed. As described above, the demo screen and the option menu display screen can be switched by the player operation with the option menu display disabled period in between.

  When the symbol variation display is started, the screen is switched to a decorative symbol variation display screen that does not display information to be provided to the player.

  The option menu display disabled period may be 0 seconds. That is, the option menu may be displayed as soon as the button is pressed at the moment of returning to the demo screen. The option menu may be displayed again after a specific period of time has elapsed after the option menu display ends. That is, the option menu display may be redisplayed without any player operation. The specific period may be the same as the option menu non-displayable period, or may include a period including the option menu non-displayable period (a period longer than the option menu non-displayable period). The period may be included (a period shorter than the option menu display disabled period).

  The demonstration screen is a customer waiting screen and is executed as one of demonstration demonstrations. This demonstration effect is an effect executed when the next symbol variation display does not start until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display ends. More specifically, the demonstration effect is not only a simulation variation of the symbol variation display, but also, for example, a title display of a gaming table, a predetermined character, etc. are displayed to explain the characteristics of the gaming table. The effects to be performed, the lamp effects accompanying these effects, the sound effects, and the like are applicable. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a demo flag, and when the demo flag is set to ON, the first sub-control unit 400 sends a decorative symbol display device to the second sub-control unit 500. Instruct 208 to display a demonstration screen (demonstration screen), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the demonstration screen. The demonstration effect ends with a predetermined opportunity. For example, the process is terminated when there is a new winning at the special figure starting port (230, 231). As the demonstration performance ends, the demo flag is set off.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a demonstration screen.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19A shows a state where a combination of decorative symbols (here, “decoration 3”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed. If the next symbol variation display does not start until 30 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 1A, the first demo screen shown in FIG. 1B is displayed. In the first demonstration screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19B, the combination of the decorative symbols previously stopped and displayed ("decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1") Is displayed as it is, and in the lower part, it is notified that the option menu is displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed. Note that the option menu may not be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 40 seconds) has elapsed from the stop of the symbol variation display, and the notification may be performed after the option menu can be displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop of the symbol variation display, the display shown in FIG. 5B may not be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds after the display becomes possible).

  If the next symbol variation display does not start until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the first demo screen shown in FIG. The screen switches to the second demo screen shown in FIG. In the second demonstration screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19C, the model title of the game machine is displayed, and in the lower part, the option menu is displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed. It has been reported that. Note that this notification may not be performed on the second demonstration screen.

  The first demo screen shown in FIG. 5B and the second demo screen shown in FIG. 5C are alternately switched every predetermined time.

  FIG. 20 is a transition diagram of the option menu.

  As described above, when the effect button 136 is operated after the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 19 is displayed, the initial screen of the option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 21A is a diagram showing an initial screen of the option menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the option menu, display of game-related information for the player, adjustment of volume and brightness, and the like are prepared. That is, user menu display, model information display, jackpot history display, sound adjustment, and brightness adjustment are prepared.

  In the lower corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21A, that is, below the option menu, icons of operation means that can be operated are displayed together with functions (selection, determination, closing). That is, it is displayed that the selection operation can be performed with the cross key 191 illustrated in FIG. 16, the determination operation can be performed with the OK button 192 or the effect button 136, and the option menu can be ended with the cancel button 193. Yes. These displays may be omitted.

  FIG. 21A shows that the item surrounded by a thick line is selected, and “model information” is selected. In this state, when the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a model information display screen.

  FIG. 21B is a diagram showing a display screen of model information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On this model information display screen, information of each model such as a game flow is displayed.

  As shown in the transition diagram of FIG. 20, when a determination operation is performed with the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 in a state where the display screen of the model information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. Return to the initial screen shown (same for others).

  From the initial screen shown in FIG. 21 (a), as indicated by the arrow * 1 shown in FIG. 20 when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the cancel button 193 is pressed or no key operation is performed, FIG. Return to the demo screen shown. Further, in FIGS. 21A to 21C, the demo screen is returned after a predetermined time has elapsed since the cancel button was pressed or no key operation was performed.

  In addition, when the initial display of the option menu, the model information display screen, etc. are displayed (including during the selection operation, etc.) and the symbol variation display starts, these screen displays (option Menu) is canceled and symbol variation display is performed as indicated by the arrow * 2 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 21C is a diagram showing a display screen for the jackpot history displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When “big hit history” is selected on the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. 10A and a determination operation is performed, a display screen of the big hit history shown in FIG. Is done. In the jackpot history display screen, the hit history of the pachinko machine 100 so far is displayed. Note that a limit may be placed on the displayable jackpot history. When a limit is provided, the history may be deleted from those exceeding the limit number. The big hit history may be erased when the power is turned off or the RAM is cleared.

  FIG. 22A is a diagram showing a sound adjustment screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When “sound adjustment” is selected on the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. 21A and a determination operation is performed, the sound adjustment screen shown in FIG. 22A is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. . On this sound adjustment screen, the player can adjust the volume of the speaker 120 to an arbitrary volume. The sound volume is set to the initial value (the setting of the game machine or the store) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned off, the RAM was cleared, the symbol variation display stopped, or the symbol variation display stopped and the user menu or option menu had not been operated. It is also possible to return the value to a value determined in advance by adjustment.

  FIG. 22B is a diagram showing a brightness adjustment screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When “brightness adjustment” is selected on the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. 21A and a determination operation is performed, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. Is done. In this brightness adjustment screen, the brightness of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be adjusted to the player's preferred brightness, as with the tone adjustment. In FIG. 22B, “normal” luminance is selected.

  It should be noted that a mode (for example, a power saving mode) in which sound adjustment or brightness cannot be adjusted by turning on / off the switch may be settable.

  FIG. 22C is a diagram showing an initial screen of the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When “User MENU” is selected on the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. 21A and a determination operation is performed, the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. Is done. The user menu relates to game-related information for the player. In the initial screen shown in FIG. 22 (c), on the left side are "member registration", "password entry", "two-dimensional code issuance", "personal data clear" and A selection window 2081 displaying “End” is prepared, and a message window 2082 is prepared on the right side. When this “user menu” is selected and a determination operation is performed, the pachinko machine shifts to the original mode.

  In addition, in FIGS. 22A to 22B, the demo screen is returned after a predetermined time has elapsed since the cancel button was pressed or no key operation was performed.

    Furthermore, when the entrance to the special figure start opening (or the general start opening) is detected at any timing of FIGS. 21 and 22, the screen display of the option menu system shown in FIGS. 21 to 22 is canceled, Symbol variation display is performed.

  In addition, during the non-electric support state, the electric chew is open for a long time (for example, 5.8 seconds) with respect to the normal opening time (for example, 0.3 second). Or, even when the power support mode is not limited to the non-power support mode, and there is a general plan to open the power mode, and the effect of opening the power mode is started, the option menu screen display is canceled. It is also possible to display the effect of opening the electric tulong with the option menu screen display without canceling, or to restrict the effect of opening the electric tulong while displaying the option menu screen. Good.

  FIG. 23 is a transition diagram of the user menu, and FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a state in which member registration is performed from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the lower corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24A, that is, at the lower side of the initial screen of the user menu, the icon of the operation means that can be operated is displayed in the same way as the option menu display. ) Is displayed.

  In FIG. 24A, the cursor C is operated by the cross key 191 shown in FIG. 16, and “member registration” is selected in the selection window 2081 on the left side. Further, the message window 2082 on the right side is displayed with characters for recommending member registration.

  When the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed while “member registration” is selected, a display screen for member registration is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 24B is a diagram showing a member registration display screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On this member registration screen, a two-dimensional code Q1 for member registration is displayed and guided to the password input screen. Since the password can be selected on the initial screen of the user menu, the user menu may be returned to the initial screen.

  The member registration two-dimensional code Q1 shown in FIG. 24B includes the URL of the registration page for initial registration on the server S side shown in FIG. ) Etc. are not included and can be reissued. The two-dimensional code Q1 for member registration is for acquiring a password.

  To set the original mode, you must first register as a member. The player reads the member registration two-dimensional code Q1 with a mobile phone terminal M or a smartphone having a camera function and a barcode reader function as shown in FIG. 16, and acquires the URL of the initial registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile phone terminal M. The server S acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the mobile phone terminal M or the smartphone, or may be information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the server S in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the server S, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile phone terminal M or the smartphone.

  A player who has already registered as a member and wants to set the original mode must enter a password. The password can be acquired by accessing the password issuing page of the server S from the mobile phone terminal M or the smartphone. When the server S acquires the personal identification information of the person who has accessed, the server S issues history information stored in association with the personal identification information and a password including the personal identification information (ID), and the mobile phone terminal M And the password is displayed on the display screen of the smartphone.

  The password is encrypted with a predetermined number of digits, for example, “GI ¥ LS”. The amount of information that can be included in the password depends on the number of digits of the password × the number of input character types. The password may include only personal identification information for identifying the player, and the history information may be stored in association with the personal identification information on the game stand side. By storing the game, even if the table is moved, the game can be performed in the original mode under the same conditions.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a password is input from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 25A, the cursor C is operated by the cross key 191, and “password input” is selected in the selection window 2081 on the left side. Further, the message window 2082 on the right side is displayed with characters for recommending password entry.

  When the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed while “password input” is selected, a password entry screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 25B is a diagram showing a password input screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On this password input screen, while viewing the display screen of the mobile phone terminal M or smartphone to which the password has been transmitted, the cross key 191 is operated to move to a desired character position, and the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed. By doing so, the input character is determined. On the display screen shown in FIG. 25B, the character “G @ 4A” is input, and T is about to be selected as the last character. When the five-character password entry is completed, the cross key 191 is operated, the cursor is moved to the “decision” position, and the OK button 192 or the production button 136 is pressed, so that the entered password is changed to the pachinko machine 100 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In the pachinko machine where the password is entered, the encrypted password is decrypted to obtain history information. If the history information cannot be acquired or the model code included in the history information is not supported, the password could not be recognized (“authentication failure message” shown in FIG. 23). Is notified and the screen returns to the password input screen. If the player misses password input a plurality of times (for example, three times), the player may return to the option menu without displaying the password input screen. Furthermore, if a password is incorrectly entered a plurality of times, the password may not be entered for a predetermined period (for example, one game) or a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

  On the other hand, when the history information can be acquired, it is notified that the password has been successfully recognized (“authentication success message” shown in FIG. 23), and the setting of the original mode is completed. In this embodiment, the original mode cannot be set unless a correct password is input. When the original mode is set, a history including the game result after setting and the like is temporarily stored in the pachinko machine 100. In addition, it is possible to enjoy a game reflecting the history information included in the password. For example, the continuation of the game represented by the history information included in the password can be enjoyed, or a privilege according to the history information is given. When the password is successfully recognized, the screen returns to the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. Thus, the message differs depending on whether the password authentication is successful or unsuccessful.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a password is input from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 26A, the cursor C is operated by the cross key 191 and “issue two-dimensional code” is selected in the selection window 2081 on the left side.

  In the right message window 2082, an issue confirmation message is displayed. The issue confirmation message is displayed when a password is entered. If the game record is erased when the two-dimensional code is issued, the fact may be notified. On the other hand, if no password is entered, a message notifying that no password has been entered (“password not entered message” shown in FIG. 23) is displayed, and an initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 22C is displayed. Is done.

  When the “OK” button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed while “2D code issuance” is selected, a 2D code issuance screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 26B is a diagram showing a two-dimensional code issuance screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the two-dimensional code issue screen, a two-dimensional code Q2 generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed and a character display recommending access to the server S is displayed. The issuance of the two-dimensional code Q2 is prepared on the assumption that the player selects it when the game with the original mode set is finished. Hereinafter, the two-dimensional code Q2 shown in FIG. 26B may be referred to as a two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game.

  The two-dimensional code here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size is changed in increments of 4 cells in the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. Can do. A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional code is an image having a predetermined pattern that cannot be identified by the player. Instead of the two-dimensional code, a URL itself, a one-dimensional barcode, an encrypted character string, or a color code may be used. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is much larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the number of character strings increases, which cannot be remembered by humans and cannot be completely written. Therefore, the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.

  In the present embodiment, personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, and a privilege (for example, a cumulative value of original mode points) given to the player are added to the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game. Contains information to represent. In addition, the number of winnings at the special figure starting port (230, 232), the total number of reel rotations, the number of bonuses (big hit), the number of small wins (small hits), store identification information in the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. , Information unique to the game machine, movable status, number of errors, etc. may be included. Information representing the game result, mission achievement status, accumulated value of original mode points, number of winnings, etc. correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the server S.

  When the player photographs the issued two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game using the camera function of the mobile phone terminal M or the smartphone, the barcode reader function is activated. The display screen of the mobile phone terminal M shown in FIG. 16 includes “http: //www.˜/jp” representing the address of the update reception page prepared in the server S, and is included in the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game. A URL to which an argument indicating personal identification information (ID) or history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game, it is stored in the server S so far in association with the personal identification information included in the argument portion. The history information is updated to the history information included in the argument part.

  On the server S side, a customization page for accepting customization such as production contents (for example, appearance characters) may be prepared.

  In the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 26 (b), the cursor C is positioned on the end button. In this state, when the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, a confirmation message (“end confirmation message” shown in FIG. 23) as to whether or not the display of the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game is really finished is displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code Q2 is erased from the pachinko machine 100. The confirmation message includes a “Yes” button and a “No” button. When the OK button 192 or the production button 136 is pressed while the cursor is positioned on the “Yes” button, the option shown in FIG. Return to the initial menu screen. On the other hand, when the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed with the cursor placed on the “No” button, the screen returns to the two-dimensional code issue screen shown in FIG.

  When the two-dimensional code issuance screen is ended (returning to the initial screen of the option menu), the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game may not be reissued or may be reissued.

  FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a state in which deletion of personal data is selected from the user menu.

  In FIG. 27A, the cursor C is operated by the cross key 191, and “personal data clear” is selected in the selection window 2081 on the left side. The message window 2082 on the right side displays that the current game information (including personal information and history information) is deleted from the pachinko machine 100.

  When the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed in a state where “personal data clear” is selected, a personal data clear screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 27B is a diagram showing a personal data clear screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On this personal data clear screen, a confirmation message (“Erase Confirmation Message” shown in FIG. 23) as to whether or not the current game information (including personal information and history information) can be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. ing. This confirmation message is also displayed when a password is entered. On the other hand, if no password is entered, a message notifying that no password has been entered (“password not entered message” shown in FIG. 23) is displayed, and an initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 22C is displayed. Is done.

  The confirmation message shown in FIG. 27B also includes a “Yes” button and a “No” button. When the cursor is positioned on the “Yes” button (the state shown in FIG. 27B), the OK button 192 is displayed. Alternatively, when the effect button 136 is pressed, an “erase completion message” shown in FIG. 23 is displayed, and then the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed with the cursor positioned on the “No” button, the screen returns to the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game is issued, the game information is automatically deleted. However, a player who has not registered as a member by preparing a personal data clear screen that can be forcibly deleted. In some cases, a player who has registered as a member can obtain accurate information.

  FIG. 27C is a diagram illustrating a state where the end of the user menu is selected.

  In the state shown in FIG. 27C, the cursor C is operated by the cross key 191, “Exit” is selected in the left selection window 2081, and the message window 2082 on the right indicates that the user menu is to be ended. It is in a state. When the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed in this state, the screen returns to the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG.

  When the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 is pressed in a state where the user menu is displayed to end, a demonstration screen may be displayed.

  Regardless of the option menu or user menu described above, if the symbol variation display is started during various screen displays or operations, the option menu and user menu (various screen displays and operations) are canceled. The symbol variation display is started. For example, the symbol variation display is not performed, and after launching the last ball in the game area 124, the option menu and the user menu are displayed, and the last ball wins the special chart start port (230, 232). Or a game ball that happens to be clogged or caught by the game nail 238 starts flowing down at some point and wins the special drawing start port (230, 232). In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not performed for a certain period, the option menu and the user menu can be displayed. Therefore, the game can be started while the option menu and the user menu are displayed. Even if it is, the symbol variation display can be started.

  Here, the original mode control process (step S321) in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 8 will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the original mode is set by inputting a password. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with an original mode setting flag. When the original mode is set, the original mode setting flag is turned on.

  Further, as described above, the password is encrypted, and the first sub-control unit 400 attempts to acquire history information by decrypting the encrypted password. If the history information cannot be acquired or the model code included in the history information is not supported, it is not a regular password.

  If the original mode setting flag remains off and the regular password (regular individual source information) has not been entered, the original mode control process ends. If the regular password has been entered, the personal setting reflection process is performed. . In this personal setting reflection process, the individual setting information included in the password is expanded in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. That is, the individual setting information including the history information is stored so as to be erasable. An operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 16 corresponds to an example of an operation unit, an operation of inputting a regular password using the operation key unit 190 corresponds to an example of a predetermined operation, and the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is individually provided. This corresponds to an example of setting information storage means. Next, the original mode setting flag is turned on.

  If the original mode setting flag is on and a new mission is achieved, mission achievement information update processing is performed. In this mission achievement information update process, information regarding mission achievement in the individual setting information (history information) developed in the RAM 408 is updated. The RAM 408 also has a mission achievement notification flag, which is set to ON.

  If the mission completion notification flag is set to ON and the mission completion notification is executed, the mission completion notification effect is set. The execution timing of the mission achievement notification is predetermined in the ROM 406, and may be, for example, the moment when the mission is achieved, the start of the special symbol change, or the disclosure of the round in the big hit game. In the case of the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 16, the mission achievement notification may be executed at a predetermined timing such as at the end of a period when the expected value of a player such as ART is high. Further, the mission achievement notification may be executed at irregular intervals such that the mission achievement notification is executed based on the player performing a predetermined operation. Furthermore, you may perform mission completion alert | report based on both the predetermined opportunity and an irregular opportunity. If this mission completion notification is a notification effect using the decorative symbol display device 208, a control command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform the notification effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the speaker 120. 4 is output to the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. An example of a notification effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect of displaying a two-dimensional code Q3, which will be described later. In this effect, the first sub-control unit 400 generates a two-dimensional code Q3. To do. In the original mode control process (step S321), the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 that generates the two-dimensional code Q3 (an example of access information) corresponds to an example of an access information generation unit. The two-dimensional code Q3 generated here is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when a display condition is satisfied in an access information control process described later. In addition to the two-dimensional code, for example, information that specifically provides the player that the mission has been achieved (for example, a character display indicating that mission 71 has been achieved, which is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208). It may be. This information corresponds to an example of information referred to in the present invention.

  In addition, when a plurality of missions are achieved, mission achievement notification effects may be performed in the order of time series of achievement, or the priority order of notification effects is determined in advance for each mission, and the notification effects are performed based on the priority order. You may go. Further, the mission achievement notification effect may be canceled by a game progress operation. For example, in the case of the slot machine 900 shown in FIG. 16, since other effects are started by a bet operation, a start lever ON operation, etc., the mission achievement notification effect is canceled with priority given to other effects. Also good. This mode is a mode in which priority is given to the operation related to profit (game operation).

  In the original mode control process, an individual game history update process is also executed. In this personal game history update process, there are a case where a history of a period from setting to release of an original mode in the current game is acquired, and a case where a history of accumulated games in the model is acquired. In any case, the history information of the individual setting information developed in the RAM 408 is updated to the acquired information. For example, the cumulative value of the above-mentioned original mode points is updated according to the mission achievement status.

  Furthermore, in the original mode control process, if an operation for confirming the contents of the history information stored in the pachinko machine 100 (RAM 408) is performed using the operation key unit 190, the original mode setting information notification process is performed. In the original mode setting information notification process, a control command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display information based on the history information developed in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. Further, when outputting sound from the speaker 120, the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 4 is instructed to output sample sound.

  If there is a request for issuing the two-dimensional code described with reference to FIG. 26, an original mode reflected image generation process is performed. In the original mode reflected image generation processing, a two-dimensional code (two-dimensional code Q2 for game end) including the history information and the like stored so far stored in the RAM 408 is generated. The two-dimensional code Q2 generated here is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the display condition is satisfied in the access information control process described later. The two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game includes personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, information indicating the mission achievement status, information indicating the accumulated value of the original mode points, and an update reception page prepared in the server S URL is included. Note that the password is not limited to a two-dimensional code, and may be, for example, a password made up of a series of numbers and symbols, and the personal setting information including history information is reflected by inputting the password as it is to the gaming machine at the next game. You may comprise as follows.

  When the generation of the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game is finished, the personal setting information stored in the RAM 408 is deleted from the RAM 408, and the original mode control process is finished. Further, even when there is a request for clearing personal data described with reference to FIG. 27, the personal setting information stored in the RAM 408 is deleted from the RAM 408. By forcibly deleting the individual setting information, the individual setting information of the previous player is forgotten to be deleted, and the individual setting information of the previous player is included in the individual setting information of the next player. There are cases where it can be prevented. For a player who enjoys the mission achievement itself, if the mission is cleared by another person, the sense of accomplishment may not be experienced and the interest may be reduced. In addition, if all of the game history in the period when the individual setting information is set is included in the two-dimensional code, the history information will be displayed when the player is changed while the individual setting information is set. Is no longer correct. However, according to the present embodiment, such things are unlikely to occur.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example in which the special symbol variation display is started in a state where the sound adjustment screen shown in FIG. 22A in the option menu is displayed and the volume is adjusted by the player. .

  In FIG. 28A, a sound adjustment screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player operates the cross key 191 to adjust the volume. This sound adjustment screen is a screen that represents information that prompts the user to adjust the volume, or a kind of information that provides the player with information on the currently set volume. At this stage, the special symbol variation display is not performed and the symbol is stopped.

  Then, there is a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure symbol change display is started. As shown in FIG. 5B, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the sound adjustment screen to the decorative symbol variation display screen. In this example, a fourth symbol 2083 is displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol 2083 informs that the symbol variation is being displayed by repeating blinking. In the following drawings, white represents lighting and dark gray represents unlit. Since the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 has been switched to the decorative symbol variation display screen, the sound adjustment screen that has been displayed so far is not visible. FIG. 7B also shows a state in which all of the seven segments in the first special figure display device 212 are turned on and the center one segment is turned on (the same applies to the following drawings). .

  In FIG. 28 (c), the special symbol display of the special symbol is finished, and the first special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the symbol pattern of the loss, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a combination of the decorative symbol of the loss. It is displayed. Again, the sound adjustment screen is not visible. Note that the fourth symbol 2083 has finished blinking and is turned off.

  When the fixed symbol display period for the first special symbol display device 212 has passed, the sound adjustment screen is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 28 (d-1), a state is shown in which the screen returns to the sound adjustment screen just before the special symbol variation display is started. That is, the volume level is a volume level adjusted by the player.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 28 (d-2), the volume level on the sound adjustment screen displayed again is returned to the volume level (initial value) before being adjusted by the player.

  Here, when the fixed symbol display period of the first special figure display device 212 has passed, the display immediately returns to the sound adjustment screen, but the sound adjustment screen is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). You may make it return to.

Also, other screens in the option menu (screens showing information provided to players)
But the same is true.

  In this way, the screen representing the information provided to the player disappears once, giving priority to the display that conceals the screen, while preventing the player from being disadvantaged by redisplaying the screen There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example in which the special symbol variation display is started in the state where the member registration screen shown in FIG. 24B is displayed in the user menu.

  In FIG. 29A, a member registration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a two-dimensional code Q1 for member registration (corresponding to an example of access information) is shown. Then, there is a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure symbol change display is started. As shown in FIG. 5B, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the member registration screen is switched to the decorative symbol variable display screen, and the fourth symbol 2083 starts to blink. As a result, the two-dimensional code Q1 is not visible.

  In FIG. 29 (c), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished, the first special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the symbol pattern of the losing, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a combination of the decorative symbol of the losing symbol. It is displayed. Further, the fourth symbol 2083 has finished blinking and is turned off. Again, the two-dimensional code Q1 is not visible.

  When the fixed symbol display period for the first special symbol display device 212 has passed, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the member symbol registration screen is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol variation display is displayed. The two-dimensional code Q1 which is the same as the two-dimensional code Q1 for member registration which was shown before the start is shown. In this way, the access information (here, the two-dimensional code Q1) disappears once, and priority is given to the display that conceals the access information, while the access information is redisplayed, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. May be prevented.

  In the example shown in FIG. 29, the period from the issuance operation of the member registration two-dimensional code Q1 to the start of the decorative symbol variation display corresponds to an example of the first period. The period being performed corresponds to an example of the second period, and the third period starts when the final display of the decorative symbols ends.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example in which the symbol variation display of the special figure is started in the state where the password input screen shown in FIG. 25B is displayed in the user menu.

  In FIG. 30A, the password input screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the operation key unit 190 is operated, and the password is input halfway. This password input screen is a screen representing a kind of information for prompting the user to input a password or providing a player with a character input operation method (keyboard input). In the display screen shown in FIG. 30A, the character “G @ 4A” is input, and T is about to be selected as the last character. Then, there is a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure symbol change display is started. As shown in FIG. 5B, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the password input screen is switched to the decorative symbol variable display screen, and the fourth symbol 2083 starts to blink. As a result, the password input screen is not visible.

  In FIG. 30 (c), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished, the first special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the symbol pattern of the losing, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a combination of the decorative symbol of the losing symbol. It is displayed. Further, the fourth symbol 2083 has finished blinking and is turned off. Again, the password entry screen is not visible.

  When the fixed symbol display period for the first special symbol display device 212 has passed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the password input screen again. In the example shown in FIG. 30 (d-1), the halfway password ("G @ 4A") that was input immediately before the start of special symbol variation display is displayed, and the letter T is selected. It is in the state.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 30 (d-2), the password ("G @ 4A") that was input just before the special symbol variation display starts is deleted and nothing is input. Not. The character selection is at the initial position (position of the character A).

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example in which the symbol variation display of the special figure is started in the state where the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 26B is displayed in the user menu.

  In FIG. 31A, a two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a two-dimensional code Q2 (corresponding to an example of access information) for ending a game is shown.

  Then, there is a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure symbol change display is started. As shown in FIG. 5B, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the two-dimensional code issuance screen to the decorative symbol variation display screen, and the fourth symbol 2083 starts to blink. As a result, the two-dimensional code Q2 is not visible.

  In FIG. 31 (c), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished, the first special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the symbol pattern of the losing, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a combination of the decorative symbol of the losing symbol. It is displayed. Further, the fourth symbol 2083 has finished blinking and is turned off. Again, the two-dimensional code Q2 is not visible.

  When the fixed symbol display period of the first special symbol display device 212 has passed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the two-dimensional code issue screen again as shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code Q2 is shown. The two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game shown here is a two-dimensional code Q2 representing information obtained by adding data for one symbol variation display of the special figure in FIG. 31 (b) to FIG. 31 (c). There is a case where it is different from the two-dimensional code Q2 shown before the symbol variation display of the special figure is started. In particular, when the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game includes information indicating the number of times the special symbol is displayed, the two-dimensional code Q2 shown in FIG. This is different from the two-dimensional code Q2 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the two-dimensional code Q2 shown in FIG. 31D may be the same as the two-dimensional code Q2 shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, the period from the issuing operation of the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game to the start of the decorative symbol variation display corresponds to an example of the first period. The period being performed corresponds to an example of the second period, and the third period starts when the final display of the decorative symbols ends.

  Whether an option menu or user menu is used, if an error occurs during various screen displays or operations, the option menu and user menu (various screen displays and operations) will be canceled once. A warning screen is displayed, or the warning screen makes it difficult or impossible to see.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example in which an error has occurred in the state where the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 26B is displayed in the user menu.

  In FIG. 32A, a two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a two-dimensional code Q2 for ending a game (corresponding to an example of access information) is shown. Then, the front frame door 106 is opened for some reason (for example, fraud) and a warning is notified. As shown in FIG. 5B, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a warning screen 2084 is superimposed on the two-dimensional code issuance screen, and the two-dimensional code Q2 displayed so far becomes invisible on the warning screen 2084.

  In FIG. 32 (c), the error is resolved (here, the front frame door 106 is closed), and the two-dimensional code issuing screen is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game is displayed. It is shown. The two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game shown here is the same as the two-dimensional code Q2 shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32, the period from the operation of issuing the two-dimensional code Q2 to the occurrence of the door opening error corresponds to an example of the first period, and the display of the warning screen 2084 corresponds to an example of the second period. When the display of the warning screen 2084 ends (when the error is resolved), the third period starts.

  Note that the opening of the front frame door 106 is a serious error (an error that is suspected of fraud), and when a predetermined condition is met, such as when such a serious error occurs, even after the error is resolved. The warning screen may be continuously displayed without displaying the return screen of the option menu or the user menu.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the access information control process (step S3183) shown in FIG.

  As described above, the access information control process is executed while the demonstration effect is not being executed (during a game). In this access information control process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the display timing of access information (for example, two-dimensional code, color code, URL) (step S3183a). This display timing may be during the big hit game or during the special symbol variation display. In addition, it may be during normal symbol variation display. If it is not the display timing, this access information control process ends, and if it is the display timing, it is next determined whether or not the second condition is satisfied (step S3183b). This second condition (corresponding to an example of a specific condition) is established when a predetermined type of effect (first effect) is being executed. Examples of the predetermined types of effects include a probabilistic promotion effect, an on-hold look-ahead effect, a super reach effect, and the like. If the specific condition here is satisfied, this access information control process is terminated. That is, the access information is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while a predetermined type of effect is being executed. On the other hand, if a specific condition is not satisfied (if a predetermined type of effect is not being executed), a control command for displaying access information is set in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the RAM 408 (step S3183c). The menu control process ends. The control command set here is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 15A, and an initial screen of the option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done.

  Next, a specific display example of access information will be described. In this description, the two-dimensional code Q3 is used as the access information, but this two-dimensional code Q3 represents information necessary for accessing a Web page of a predetermined server. For example, It represents the URL of the Web page, or a password added. In this Web page, for example, mission clear information is displayed, the current game history is displayed, rare characters are displayed, and the external device used for access such as the mobile phone terminal M or the smartphone is on standby. It may be a page where an image such as a screen or a content such as music can be downloaded. That is, it may be a page where some information or privilege is given to the player. As a premise for displaying the access information, it may be assumed that the original mode is set, that is, the password input described with reference to FIG. 25 is performed, but the original mode is not set (no password is input). ), The access information may be displayed. In this case, if a function that prompts the user to enter a password is added to the web page accessed by the player, the achievement of the mission is prevented from being invalidated even if the mission is completed even if the password is not entered. May be preferred. In addition, if a function for encouraging member registration is added, it may be possible to acquire a new member, which is also preferable.

  The two-dimensional code Q3 in this example is different from the above-described two-dimensional code Q1 for member registration, unlike the two-dimensional code Q2 for ending the game, but when the original mode is not set (password not input) The same two-dimensional code as the member registration two-dimensional code Q1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a probable promotion effect is performed at the end of the big hit game. The probability variation promotion effect in the following description is an effect corresponding to an example of the predetermined type of effect.

  FIG. 34A shows a state after “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” corresponding to 7R special jackpot is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In the ornamental symbol display device 208, FIG. A big hit game start effect is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5B, the first round is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays characters representing the first round (R), “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit, characters appearing during the round, and characters prompting access to the two-dimensional code Q3. ing. This two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed in the lower right corner area (access image display area) of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The third round is performed from the same figure (c) and the same figure (d), and the character showing the 3rd round (R) is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit, a character appearing in the round, a two-dimensional code Q3 (corresponding to an example of the first access image), and a character that prompts access. ing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5E, the fifth round is performed, and characters representing the fifth round (R) are displayed. Also on the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit, characters appearing during the round, and characters that prompt access to the two-dimensional code Q3 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5F, the seventh round which is the final round is performed, and characters representing the seventh round (R) are displayed. Also on the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit, characters appearing during the round, and characters that prompt access to the two-dimensional code Q3 are displayed. In this example, the two-dimensional code Q3 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the round digestion. The period from the start of the first round to the end of the seventh round corresponds to an example of the first period.

  In this example, the two-dimensional code is displayed in all rounds, but the two-dimensional code may be displayed in a specific round (the same applies to the following examples). For example, the two-dimensional code may be displayed only in the final round (7R in this example), 1R to 3R, or the like. Further, the two-dimensional code may be displayed over the entire period in one round, but the two-dimensional code may be displayed only in a part of the period (the same applies to the following examples).

  In FIG. 5G, the seventh round of digestion is over, and a big hit game end effect is performed. The 7R special big hit (probable big hit) and the 7R big hit (normal big hit) correspond to the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. Probability promotion effect that informs what to do is performed. That is, in this example, during the round digestion, notification is made at the end of the jackpot game, without notifying that the transition to the probability change state after the jackpot game ends. In this probable promotion effect, the protagonist appears as a peace sign on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the characters “probability change rush” are displayed. On the other hand, during the round digestion, the two-dimensional code Q3 continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed (disappears) or disappears from the player while the probable promotion effect is being performed. The player can concentrate on the probable promotion effect. The two-dimensional code Q3 here may include, for example, the URL of a Web page that informs that the 7R special jackpot is won, or the Web page that informs that the 7R jackpot winning mission is achieved. It may include a URL. The period in which the probable promotion effect is executed corresponds to an example of the second period.

  Even after the end of the current jackpot game, even before the next jackpot game, there are two events depending on a predetermined opportunity (for example, an opportunity to achieve a mission, an opportunity to press an effect button 136, an opportunity to start a special symbol change display, etc.). The period in which the dimension code Q3 is displayed and the two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed again corresponds to an example of a third period. Note that the two-dimensional code Q3 may not be displayed until the big hit game is performed again after the current big hit game. That is, the two-dimensional code Q3 may not be displayed until one round of the next jackpot game is started. In this case, the period during the round of the next jackpot game is an example of the third period. Equivalent to.

  The two-dimensional code Q3 may be displayed at the timing of switching the round display, and may disappear once before or at the end of the round. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the round display change timing (timing to change from 2R to 3R) and the opening start timing of the door member 2341 (attacker) of the variable prize opening 234 may be the same timing, or the decorative symbol display. In the device 208, the attacker opening start timing may be earlier or later than the round display change timing. In any case, the display start timing of the two-dimensional code Q3 may be the same timing as the round display change timing, or may be earlier than the round display change timing (for example, When the attacker is closed or when the previous round number is displayed), the timing may be later than the change timing of the round display.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example in which a probable promotion effect is performed in the middle of a big hit game. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIG. 34 will be mainly described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, two types of two-dimensional codes (first two-dimensional code Q31 and second two-dimensional code Q32) are displayed as the two-dimensional code Q3. The first two-dimensional code Q31 corresponds to an example of a first access image, and the second two-dimensional code Q32 corresponds to an example of a second access image.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (b), the first round is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 includes a character representing the first round (R), “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit, a character appearing during the round, and a first access image that is an example of a first access image. A two-dimensional code Q31 and characters that prompt access are displayed.

  The third round is performed from the same figure (c) and the same figure (d), and the character showing the 3rd round (R) is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit and characters appearing during the round. Furthermore, until the middle of the third round, the first two-dimensional code Q31 and characters that prompt access are also displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first probable promotion effect is performed in the middle of the third round (for example, immediately before the end). In this example, during the round digestion, it is notified that the game will shift to a probable change state after the jackpot game ends. That is, it is notified earlier than the example shown in FIG. In this first probable promotion effect, a hero's spear appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the characters “probability” are displayed. On the other hand, the first two-dimensional code Q31 that has been displayed so far is not displayed (disappears) or disappears from the player while the first probable promotion effect is being performed. Can focus on the first probable promotion. Here, the first two-dimensional code Q31 may include, for example, a URL of a Web page that informs that the 7R special jackpot is won, or informs that the 7R jackpot winning mission is achieved. The URL of the web page may be included. In this example, the period from the start of the first round to the start of the first probability change promotion effect corresponds to an example of the first period, and the period during which the first probability change promotion effect is executed is the second period. It corresponds to an example.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5E, the fourth round has started, and the first probability variation promotion effect has ended. The decorative symbol display device 208 includes characters representing the fourth round (R), “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit, “probability” characters, characters appearing during the round, and the second access image. A second two-dimensional code Q32, which is an example, and characters that prompt access are displayed. That is, the second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed at the start of the fourth round. This second two-dimensional code Q32 may include, for example, a URL of a Web page that informs that a 7R jackpot winning mission has been achieved, and is used for rare characters and access in addition to mission achievement. It may include a URL of a Web page that can download content to the external device. That is, the second two-dimensional code Q32 may be higher in profit for the player than the first two-dimensional code Q31, or may be lower. Alternatively, the profits may be the same, but URLs of different web pages may be included. In this example, the third period starts from the start of the next round after the first probable promotion effect has ended.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5F, the seventh round which is the final round is performed, and the second two-dimensional code Q32 is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 5G, the seventh round of digestion is over, and a big hit game end effect is performed. Here again, the second probabilistic promotion effect for informing that the probable state has been entered is performed. While the second probability change promotion effect (second probability change promotion effect) is being performed, the second two-dimensional code Q32 is not displayed (disappears) or is not visible to the player, and the player is You can also concentrate on the second probable promotion.

  As described above, in this example, during the first probability change promotion effect (the probability change promotion effect shown in FIG. 35D), the first two-dimensional code Q31 is not displayed, and the first probability change promotion effect ends. The second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed later (here, when 4R starts). Thus, even if the player cannot obtain the first two-dimensional code Q31 (first access image), the second two-dimensional code Q32 (second access image) is displayed. This may prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  The first probability variation promotion effect may be less than 100% in reliability and may be a so-called false probability variation promotion effect, but even if it is a false probability variation promotion effect, the first two-dimensional The code Q31 is not displayed. Further, the second two-dimensional code Q32 may be displayed during the big hit end effect without displaying the second probability variation promotion effect.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a first modification of FIG. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIG. 35 will be mainly described.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 36, the probable promotion effect is performed in the middle of the big hit game, but the timing at which the first two-dimensional code Q31 disappears is different from the example shown in FIG. That is, the first two-dimensional code Q31 disappears at the start timing of the round in which the first probability change promotion effect is performed. FIG. 36C is a diagram showing the state of the timing when the third round is started, and the first two-dimensional code Q31 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36 as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 35, the second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed at the start of the first round (here, four rounds) after the end of the first probability change promotion effect. Has been. In addition, the fact that the two-dimensional code is not displayed may indicate that a certain change promotion effect is performed. In this case, the two-dimensional code may not be displayed even when the probability variation promotion effect is not performed.

  In the example of FIG. 36, the period from the start of one round to the start of the round in which the predetermined effect (first probability change promotion effect) is performed corresponds to an example of the first period, and the predetermined effect is executed. The period of time corresponds to an example of the second period, and the third period starts from the start of the first round (here, four rounds) after the end of the predetermined performance.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a second modification of FIG. Here, the description will focus on the differences from the example shown in FIG.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 37, the first probability variation promotion effect is performed, and the two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed at the start of the first round (four rounds here) after the end of the first probability variation promotion effect. However, even after the end of the first probability change promotion effect, the same two-dimensional code as the two-dimensional code before the start of the first probability change promotion effect, that is, the first two-dimensional code Q31 is displayed. Therefore, the first two-dimensional code Q31 that has been displayed until then disappears once by the first probability change promotion effect, and once the first probability change promotion effect ends, the first two-dimensional code Q31 that has once disappeared is displayed again. Will be. The second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed from the beginning of the first round, and during the first probability variation promotion effect, the second two-dimensional code Q32 is not displayed, and the first probability variation promotion effect ends. Later, the second two-dimensional code Q32 may be displayed again.

  The second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed on the big hit start display (FIG. 37 (a), etc.), the big hit (FIGS. 37 (b) to (f)), and the big hit end display (FIG. 37 (g), etc.). You may make it do.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the on-hold prefetching effect is performed during the big hit game. The on-hold prefetching effect in the following description is an effect corresponding to an example of the predetermined type of effect.

  FIG. 38A shows a state after “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to 15R special jackpot is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In the ornamental symbol display device 208, FIG. A big hit game start effect is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5B, the first round is performed. This decorative symbol display device 208 includes characters representing the first round (R), “decoration 7” at the time of the big hit, characters appearing during the round, and the two-dimensional code Q3 described with reference to FIG. The same type of two-dimensional code Q3 and characters that prompt access are displayed.

  The sixth round is performed from FIG. 5C to FIG. 8E, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays characters representing the sixth round (R). The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays “decoration 7” at the time of the big hit and characters appearing during the round. Further, until the middle of the sixth round, the two-dimensional code Q3 and characters that prompt access are also displayed. However, the pre-reading effect in the hold is performed in the middle of the sixth round. The pre-reading effect on hold executes the special figure pre-reading process described with reference to FIG. 9 for the start information of special figure 1 or special figure 2 held before the big hit game or during the big hit game, It is an effect that gives notice (suggestion) that there is. Note that the on-hold prefetching effect here may actually be executed even if there is no big hit. In this case, the on-hold prefetching effect becomes a false on-hold prefetching effect. Moreover, you may perform the pre-reading | holding preproduction effect only for the hold of special figure 2 among special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. When the on-hold prefetching effect is executed, the character that has appeared so far disappears and an image of the army marching is displayed. In addition, the symbol of “decoration 7” at the time of the big hit is made translucent, and the image of the army marching is highlighted. The two-dimensional code Q3 that has been displayed so far is not displayed (disappears) or disappears from the player while the on-hold prefetching effect is being performed, and the player concentrates on the on-hold prefetching effect. can do. When the on-hold prefetching effect ends, the characters that appear during the round reappear, and the two-dimensional code Q3 and the characters that prompt access are redisplayed. That is, the on-hold pre-reading effect is started in the middle of the round, and the on-hold pre-reading effect ends before the end of the round, and the two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed again. The same two-dimensional code as the two-dimensional code before the start of the on-hold prefetching effect is displayed.

  Note that the display of the two-dimensional code Q3 may be resumed at the start of the next round (here, seven rounds) (the same applies to the examples shown below).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5F, the 15th round which is the final round is performed, and characters representing the 15th round (R) are displayed. Also on this decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7” at the time of the big hit, characters appearing in the round, and characters that prompt access to the two-dimensional code Q3 are displayed.

  In FIG. 5G, 15 rounds of digestion have been completed, and a promising promotion effect is performed as a big hit game end effect. While the probability change promotion effect is being performed, the two-dimensional code Q3 is not displayed (disappears) or is not visible to the player, and the player can concentrate on the probability change promotion effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38 described above, the period from the start of one round to the start of the on-hold prefetching effect corresponds to an example of the first period, and the period in which the on-hold prefetching effect is executed is the second. It corresponds to an example of a period, and the third period starts when the on-hold prefetching effect ends.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating another example of the on-hold prefetching effect performed in the middle of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIG. 38 will be mainly described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, sub display means 209 (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is provided separately from the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display unit 209 may be an LED lamp. The left area of the sub display means 209 shown in FIG. 39 is an area representing the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1, the right area is an area representing the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2, and each area includes: A hold icon (hold display) h is displayed. Note that the display area of the hold icon may be provided in the decorative symbol display device 208 without providing the sub display means 209. The display mode of the hold icon h is a default display mode in which the white circle display mode indicates that there is no hold and the gray display mode indicates that there is a hold. In the sub-display means 209 at the time of the big hit game start effect shown in FIG. 5A, it is displayed that four special figure 1 holds are stored and one special figure 2 hold is stored.

  Also in this example, the two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed simultaneously with the start of the round. In addition, even if the player enters the 6th round, there is no winning at the special drawing start port (230, 232), and the number of holds in the special drawings 1 and 2 does not change.

  The sixth round is performed from (c) to (e) in the figure, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays characters and the like indicating the sixth round (R). In the middle of the sixth round, the on-hold prefetching effect is performed. In the pre-reading effect in the hold, the “decoration 7” symbols and characters that have been displayed so far become translucent, and the image of the shooting star is displayed on the entire display screen. In addition to the pre-reading effect in hold, the display mode of the target hold icon also changes in order to notify which hold is pre-reading notice. In FIG. 39 (d), the display mode of the special figure 1 fourth hold icon h14 representing the newest 4th hold among the 4 holds in FIG. 1 is changed from the gray default display form to the flash (aura). The display mode (prefetching notice mode) is changing. It should be noted that the execution timing of the on-hold prefetch effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the change timing to the prefetch notice mode of the hold icon may be the same timing, or the execution timing of the on-hold prefetch effect is earlier. The change timing of the hold icon may be earlier.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), when the on-hold prefetching effect ends, characters appearing in the round reappear, and the same two-dimensional code Q3 as before the on-hold prefetching effect starts is displayed again. However, even if the pre-reading effect in hold is finished, the pre-reading notice change of the hold icon continues. In other words, the display mode of the special figure 1 fourth hold icon h14 remains the prefetch notice mode. The display mode of the special figure 1 fourth hold icon h14 remains the prefetch notice mode until the hold is consumed. That is, even if all rounds are completed, the pre-reading notice mode remains, and as shown in FIG. 5G, the pre-reading notice mode is maintained while the promising promotion effect is performed as the big hit game ending effect. .

  The display mode of the special figure 1 fourth hold icon h14 may be returned to the default display mode before the end of the pre-holding pre-production effect, or may be returned to the default display mode simultaneously with the end of the pre-holding pre-production effect. The default display mode may be restored after the on-hold prefetching effect ends (for example, at the start of the next round or at the end of all rounds), or may be changed again to the prefetching notice mode after the big hit game ends. Further, the pre-fetch notice mode remains until the end of the big hit game, and after the big hit game ends (for example, when the symbol variation display is disclosed), the default display mode may be restored (change may be canceled).

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a display example of a two-dimensional code using the sub display means.

  FIG. 40A shows a state after “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” corresponding to 7R special jackpot is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In the ornamental symbol display device 208, FIG. A big hit game start effect is being performed. The big hit game here is in the fifth consecutive game, and the sub display means 209 displays the fifth consecutive game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5B, the first round is performed. This decorative symbol display device 208 includes characters representing the first round (R), “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit, characters appearing during the round, and the first two described with reference to FIG. A first two-dimensional code Q31 of the same type as the dimension code Q31 and characters that prompt access are displayed. This first two-dimensional code Q31 is also displayed in the lower right corner area (access image display area) of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display means 209 displays characters “congratulations”.

  The third round is performed from FIG. 10C and FIG. 8E, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays characters representing the third round (R). The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays “decoration 4” at the time of the big hit and characters appearing during the round. Furthermore, until the middle of the third round, the first two-dimensional code Q31 and characters that prompt access are also displayed. However, in the middle of the third round, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the first positive change promotion effect, and the first two-dimensional code Q31 that has been displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so far disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first two-dimensional code Q31 is not displayed at the time when the first probability change promotion effect is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 5E, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the sub display unit 209 while the first probability change promotion effect is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208. The two-dimensional code displayed here is the same type of second two-dimensional code Q32 as the second two-dimensional code Q32 described with reference to FIG. In addition, characters for prompting access are also displayed on the sub display means 209 shown in FIG. In this way, the two-dimensional code is displayed on another display means with a slight delay from the start of the first probability change promotion effect. The second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed in the right area (access image display area) of the sub display means 209. The first two-dimensional code Q31 or the second two-dimensional code Q32 may be displayed on the sub display unit 209 at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5F, the fourth round has started, and the first probability variation promotion effect has ended. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays characters representing the 4th round (R), characters “decoration 4” and “probability” at the time of the big hit, and characters appearing during the round. In addition, the second two-dimensional code Q32 displayed on the sub display unit 209 and the character prompting access are also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the first probability change promotion effect is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed. That is, the second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed in the access image display area provided in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, the two-dimensional code is not displayed on the sub display means 209, and the characters “congratulations” are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5G, the seventh round which is the final round is performed, and the second two-dimensional code Q32 is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 7 (h), the seventh round of digestion is over, and a big hit game end effect is performed. Here again, the second probabilistic promotion effect for informing that the probable state has been entered is performed. On the decorative design display device 208, the hero's spear appears as a peace sign, and the characters “probability change rush” are displayed. The second two-dimensional code Q32 is not displayed (disappears) or is not visible to the player even while the probability variation promotion effect (second probability variation promotion effect) is performed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the sub display means 209 displays the mode name of the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  The second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed on the big hit start display (FIG. 37 (a), etc.), the big hit (FIGS. 37 (b) to (f)), and the big hit end display (FIG. 37 (g), etc.). You may make it do.

  In the various examples described above, in the example where the probability change promotion effect is performed, instead of the probability change promotion effect, the prefetch selection within the hold or the button effect that is started when the effect button 136 is pressed within the predetermined reception period is performed. Alternatively, in an example in which on-hold prefetch selection is performed, a probable promotion effect or button effect may be performed instead of the on-hold prefetch selection. In the present invention, the access information in at least a part of the period (corresponding to the second period) among the periods in which a certain type of effect such as the probability change promotion effect, the prefetch selection in hold, and the button effect is performed. As an example, the secondary code Q3 is not displayed.

  Next, the display of the two-dimensional code Q3 during the special symbol design change display will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a display example of the two-dimensional code Q3 during the special symbol design change display.

  In FIG. 41A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation display. In addition, a fourth symbol 2083 is displayed at the upper right end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol 2083 shown in FIG. 41 (a) is lit. Further, a certain mission (here, mission 71) is achieved until the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started or during the symbol variation display, and the access image display in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the region 2085, the first two-dimensional code Q31 is displayed together with the character display of mission completion. The first two-dimensional code Q31 displayed here is the same type of two-dimensional code as the first two-dimensional code Q31 described with reference to FIG. For example, in the case of a mission in which the special symbol variation display is performed 100 revolutions, if the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 41 (a) is the 100th revolution, the start of the 100th symbol variation display At the same time, the first two-dimensional code Q31 is displayed in the access image display area 2085.

  In FIG. 41 (b), the decorative symbol variation display has entered the reach state. Here, in the access image display area 2085 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first two-dimensional code Q31 is still displayed together with the character display of mission completion. In addition, a text prompting access is additionally displayed.

  In FIG. 41 (c), the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed to super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the examination scene of the hero and the panda as the super reach effect. The access image display area 2085 is completely covered by the super reach effect, and the two-dimensional code Q3 is not displayed. By doing so, the player may be able to concentrate on the super reach effect, and may prevent the player from overlooking the super reach effect. Further, there are cases where the player can pay attention to the super reach effect and improve the interest of the game. In this example, the super reach effect corresponds to an example of a predetermined type of effect (first effect), and the super reach effect display corresponds to an example of the first display. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper right, and the fourth symbol 2083 is also displayed below it.

  FIG. 41 (d-1) shows a state in which the super reach effect is finished and the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed. The two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed again in the access image display area 2085 of the decorative symbol display device 208, but after the super reach effect, the second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed. The second two-dimensional code Q32 displayed here is the same type of two-dimensional code as the second two-dimensional code Q32 described with reference to FIG. Even if the super reach effect ends and the combination of decorative symbols does not immediately stop (determined display) but once fluctuates, the access image display area 2085 will be displayed when the super reach effect ends. A second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed.

  The display period of the second two-dimensional code Q32 displayed here may be a period until the next symbol variation display starts, or a predetermined time has elapsed since the display (for example, 5 seconds). May be. Further, it may be made non-displayable by a player's operation (for example, pressing of the effect button 136).

  FIG. 41 (d-2) shows a state where the super reach effect is finished and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Even in this case, the second two-dimensional code Q32 is displayed in the access image display area 2085 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display period of the second two-dimensional code Q32 displayed here may be until the start of the big hit game start effect, or may elapse for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after being displayed. It may be from the start of a predetermined round of jackpot game (for example, 1R). Also, as before, it may be made non-displayable by the player's operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 described above, the period from the start of symbol change or the mission achievement time during symbol change to the start of the super reach effect corresponds to an example of the first period, and the super reach effect is executed. The period of time corresponds to an example of the second period, and the third period starts when the super reach production ends.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a display example of another type of two-dimensional code during the special symbol design change display. Hereinafter, a description will be given focusing on differences from the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 42A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation display. In addition, the hero's niece appears with a placard 2086 when the decorative pattern change display starts. An area in the placard 2086 becomes an access image display area, and the member registration two-dimensional code Q1 (corresponding to an example of the second access image) described with reference to FIG. 24 is displayed. The two-dimensional code is not limited to the member registration two-dimensional code Q1, and may be the same type of two-dimensional code Q3 as the two-dimensional code Q3 described with reference to FIG. The placard 2086 also displays a message prompting for new subscription. This message is a message that teaches that this pachinko machine is an original mode machine and is a tutorial-like message. Thus, in the placard, a tutorial effect may be performed as an effect for explaining the game characteristics of the model to the player. Or the notice which shows the reliability of the jackpot of the symbol fluctuation display currently performed here may be included.

  In FIG. 42B, a darkening effect is performed. Due to this darkening effect, the variation display of the decorative pattern, the hero's cocoon, and the placard 2086 that the cocoon had disappeared are displayed, and the text “next notice” is displayed instead. The fourth symbol 2083 can be recognized, and it can be confirmed that the symbol variation display is continued. This darkening effect may be a notice indicating the reliability of the jackpot of the symbol variation display, or may be a notice that develops into super reach.

  In FIG. 42 (c), the darkening effect is finished, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display enters the reach state. However, the two-dimensional code Q1 is not displayed.

  In FIG. 42 (d), the decorative symbol variation display has been expanded to super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the examination scenes of the main character's habit and panda as super reach effects. Again, the two-dimensional code Q1 is not displayed.

  FIG. 42 (e-1) shows a case where the super reach effect is finished and the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed. Further, FIG. 42 (e-2) shows a case where the super reach effect is finished and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In any case, the two-dimensional code is displayed again in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The two-dimensional code displayed here may be a member registration two-dimensional code Q1, or a different two-dimensional code. Further, the second two-dimensional code Q32 may be displayed at the timing of the stop display of the big hit symbol in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 42 described above, the period from the start of symbol variation to the predetermined period, or the period from the start of symbol variation to the start of the darkening effect corresponds to an example of the first period. The period until the super reach production ends corresponds to an example of the second period, and when the super reach production ends, the third period starts. If the darkening effect is a precursor effect of the super reach effect and is included in the super reach effect, a period in which a series of super reach effects are executed corresponds to an example of the second period.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the two-dimensional code Q3 during the special symbol design change display is hidden by the effect movable body.

  In FIG. 43 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation display, and the princess character appears. In addition, with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, the access image display area 2085 displays the same type of two-dimensional code Q3 as the two-dimensional code Q3 described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, a fourth symbol 2083 is displayed at the upper right end of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 43A, the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 (corresponding to an example of the production means) shown in FIG. 3 are completely opened, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized. It has become.

  In FIG. 43 (b), the effect movable body notice (corresponding to an example of the first effect) is performed, and the left door 246a and the right door 246b that have been completely opened so far are closed halfway. Here, the left door 246a and the right door 246b are such that the shoji portion of the lattice holes are completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative pattern display device 208 on the back is completely invisible, and the right door 246b The access image display area 2085 is not visible. Therefore, the two-dimensional code Q3 is also not visible. However, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed in the visible area between the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the princess character moves to the visible area. 2083 also moves, and each is visible. The period during which the effect movable body notice in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are partially closed as described above corresponds to an example of the second period.

  Also in FIG. 43 (c), the effect movable body advance notice is performed, and in FIG. 43 (a), the left door 246a and the right door 246b that are completely open are closed halfway. However, the left door 246a and the right door 246b here are in a form in which a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice holes can be visually recognized, and a part of the two-dimensional code Q3 is formed from the holes. Is visible. It should be noted that the shoji part of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a translucent lens body, and the two-dimensional code Q3 may be displayed in a watermark. However, when a part of the information can be visually recognized or displayed with a watermark, the character information contained in the two-dimensional code Q3 cannot be extracted by the code reader function of the external device, and the server S cannot be accessed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, the effect movable body notice corresponds to an example of a predetermined type of effect (first effect). The shielding by the effect movable body is not limited to the notice effect, but may be a button effect or other effects.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an error display during the big hit game.

  FIG. 44A is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 when the third round of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 34C is being performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a two-dimensional code Q3.

  Here, it is detected by the lower plate full tank detection sensor that the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 is full by the game ball, and the first sub control unit 400 notifies the lower plate full tank error notification command from the main control unit 300. Will be sent. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 performs error notification (character display such as “please remove the ball” here) and the display of the two-dimensional code Q3 is restricted. That is, as shown in FIG. 44B, the two-dimensional code Q3 becomes invisible by error notification. The type of error is not limited to the lower pan full error.

  In FIG. 44 (c), the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to eliminate the lower pan full tank error, the error notification is terminated, and the two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed again.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, the period from the start of the round in the jackpot game to the start of error notification corresponds to an example of the first period, and the period in which error notification is performed is an example of the second period. Correspondingly, the third period starts when the error notification ends.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an error display during symbol variation.

  FIG. 45A is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 when the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 41A is being performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a two-dimensional code Q3.

  Here, an error (for example, ball clogging or the like) is detected, and an error notification command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 performs error notification (in this case, a character display such as “Please contact an error code and an attendant”), and the two-dimensional code Q3 is error notification as shown in FIG. Disappears due to.

  In FIG. 45 (c), the error notification is ended when the error is eliminated by the staff, and the two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed again. Depending on the type of error, the two-dimensional code may not be redisplayed. For example, in the case of an illegal error such as a door release error, the two-dimensional code may not be displayed again. By doing so, there may be a case where a penalty can be given to a player who is cheating without giving a disadvantage to a player who is playing a game correctly.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, the period from the start of symbol variation to the start of error notification corresponds to an example of the first period, and the period in which error notification is performed corresponds to an example of the second period. When the error notification ends, the third period starts.

  Until the description of the example using FIG. 43, the second condition of step S3183b shown in FIG. 33 (corresponding to an example of the specific condition) is that a predetermined type of effect (first effect) is being executed. However, the second condition in the examples of FIGS. 44 and 45 is a condition that is satisfied when an error is being detected.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the two-dimensional code Q3 during the hitting notification.

  FIG. 46A is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 when the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 41A is being performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a two-dimensional code Q3.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5B shows a first hitting notification for notifying that the left strike is returned. In this first hitting notification, a left-pointing arrow image 2087 is displayed large in the center of the screen, but the arrow image 2087 does not cover the access image display area 2085 in the lower right corner. However, the two-dimensional code Q3 is not displayed in the access image display area 2085 while the hitting notification is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5C, a second hitting notification for notifying the return to the left strike is shown. In this second hitting notification, a left-pointing arrow image 2088 is displayed small in the upper left of the screen, but a two-dimensional code Q3 is displayed in the access image display area 2085. As described above, a two-dimensional code may be displayed even when the hitting notification is given.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46, the period from the start of symbol variation to the start of the first striking notification shown in (b) in FIG. 46 corresponds to an example of the first period. The period being performed corresponds to an example of the second period, and the third period starts when the first hit notification is completed. In addition, the second condition in the example of FIG. 46 is a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined notification (first notification) is being executed. That is, the second condition is satisfied when a predetermined image (first image) is being displayed.

  In the above description, a description is given using a two-dimensional code as the access information. However, information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or other display means is not limited to the two-dimensional code, for example, a decoration Information such as “achievement of mission 71” (see FIG. 41 and the like) displayed on the symbol display device 208 may be used.

  Further, the two-dimensional code may be displayed only on the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display means), or may be displayed only on the sub display means (second display means). It may be displayed on both. The sub display means here may have a display screen smaller than the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be movable on the player side than the decorative symbol display device 208. Good.

In the above description,
“Image display means capable of displaying at least an image (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Access information generating means (for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 that executes the original mode control process (step S321)) capable of generating at least access information (for example, the two-dimensional code Q3);
A game machine equipped with
The image display means has at least an access image display area (for example, an access image display area 2085),
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the access information in the access image display area in a first period,
The access information is not displayed in the access image display area in the second period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the access information in the access image display area in a third period,
The second period is a period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 34 (d)) that starts after the first period (for example, the period of FIGS. 35 (b) to 35 (c)) ends. Is running)
The third period is a period that is started after the second period is completed (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 35E to 35F).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “the access information is information (for example, two-dimensional code Q3) necessary for the player to access a predetermined Web page.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the access information generating means can generate at least a first access image (for example, a first two-dimensional code Q31) as the access information,
The access information generating means can generate at least a second access image (for example, a second two-dimensional code Q32) as the access information,
The image display means can display at least the first access image in the access image display area in the first period (for example, during the period of FIGS. 35B to 35C). ,
The image display means can display at least the second access image in the access image display area in the third period (for example, during the period of FIGS. 35E to 35F). ,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the first access information and the second access information may be the same information or different information.

In addition, “the second period is a period that is started when a specific condition (for example, during execution of a predetermined type of performance) is established in the first period,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “providing production means (for example, a shielding device 246) capable of performing the production,
The second period is a period that is at least started by the execution of the first effect (for example, the effect movable body notice) by the effect means.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the second period is at least started by executing a first display (for example, a display of a super reach effect) by the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the access information is a QR code (registered trademark).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Furthermore, “a game stand having image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least an image,
The image display means has at least an information display area (for example, an access image display area 2085),
The information display area is an area in which at least information for providing to the player (for example, “achieve mission 71” shown in FIG. 41) can be displayed,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the information in the information display area in a first period,
The information is not displayed in the information display area in the second period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the information in the information display area in a third period,
The second period is a period (for example, the period of FIG. 41 (c)) that is started after the first period (for example, the period of FIGS. 41 (a) to (b)) is completed.
The third period is a period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 41 (d-1) or (d-2)) that is started after the second period ends.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the above information includes information input by the player (for example, information for specifying the volume, information for specifying the brightness, information specified by the user menu) and information regarding the gaming machine (information indicating a game flow or a game history). It may be.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means capable of displaying at least an image;
Access information generating means capable of generating at least access information;
A game machine equipped with
The access information is for providing a player;
The access image display area of the image display means is capable of displaying at least the access information during a first period,
The access image is not displayed in the access image display area during the second period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the access information when in a third period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
The third period is a period that starts after the second period ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the game stand described in Supplementary Note 1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The third period may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the second period ends, or may be started immediately after the second period ends. Also good.

  The access information may be an access image or may be replaced with an information input screen (hereinafter the same).

  The image display means may be capable of displaying access information at least in the access image display area during the third period. By displaying in the same area as described above, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the access information.

  Further, the access information displayed in the first period and the access information displayed in the third period may have different appearances or different information. That is, the appearance may be different and the information may be different, either the appearance and the information may be different and the other may be the same, or at least one of the appearance and the information may be May be different.

  Also, during the second period, access information is displayed at a position different from the position (access image display area) displayed during the first period, and the access image display area is accessed when the third period is reached. Information may be displayed.

  Further, the access information may be displayed at the same position during the first period and the third period.

  In addition, the access information may be displayed at different positions during the first period and the third period.

  Further, the access information may not be displayed on the image display means during the second period.

  In addition, when displaying a plurality of access information in the first period, in the second period, at least one access information of the plurality of access information is deleted, and at least one access information of the plurality of access information is You may make it display continuously. Alternatively, in the second period, only one of the plurality of access information may be erased (other access information is continuously displayed). Alternatively, in the second period, all of the plurality of access information may be erased. Further, in the third period, at least one of the deleted access information may be displayed (redisplayed), or the same number as the first period may be displayed. The number (plurality) larger than the second period may be displayed, or only one may be displayed.

  When a plurality of pieces of access information are displayed in the third period, a plurality of first periods may be displayed, or only one first period may be displayed. In addition, when a plurality of items are displayed in the first period, the second period may be the same as described above. On the other hand, when only one is displayed in the first period, the deletion or display position may be changed in the second period.

  In addition, during the second period, the access information may be displayed semi-transparently, at least a part may be displayed, or only a part may be displayed. Also good.

  Moreover, the display mode of the access information in the third period may be the same as the display mode in the first period. For example, the color and size may be the same. Conversely, at least one of color and size may be different. Furthermore, the display mode of the access information in the third period may be at least partially the same as the display mode of the access information in the first period. For example, in the case of a two-dimensional code, the code itself may be the same and the surrounding effects and background may be different. Further, the display mode of the access information in the third period may be different from the display mode of the access information in the first period. Further, the access information displayed in the third period may be only the access information displayed in the first period.

  Further, a plurality of image display means may be provided, for example, a combination of a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot display device, or the like, or a plurality of the same type may be used.

  The access information may be displayed on at least one of the plurality of image display means, or may be displayed only on one of the plurality of image display means. The access information may be displayed on both of the plurality of image display means. The access information is displayed on one of the plurality of image display means (first image display means) in the first period, and is different from the first image display means in the second period. It may be displayed on the image display means, and may be displayed on at least one of the first image display means and the second image display means during the third period. That is, the access information is displayed on the first image display means in the first period, is displayed on the second image display means in the second period, and is displayed only on the first image display means in the third period. May be displayed on the first image display means in the first period, displayed on the second image display means in the second period, and on both image display means in the third period. It may be displayed. The access information is displayed on the first image display means in the first period, is displayed only on the second image display means in the third period, and is not displayed on both in the second period. It may be displayed on the first image display means in the first period, displayed on the second image display means at least in the third period, and not displayed on both in the second period, It may be displayed on the first image display means in the first period, displayed on at least the first image display means in the third period, and not displayed on both in the second period. Further, the access information is displayed on the first image display means in the first period, is displayed only on the first image display means in the third period, and is not displayed on both in the second period. It may be displayed on the first image display means in the first period, not displayed on the image display means in both the first image display means and the second image display means in the second period, The period may be displayed on both the image display means. Further, the access information may be displayed only on a specific image display means among the plurality of image display means.

  Further, only the access information may be displayed in the third period, and the access information and the effect display may be performed in the fourth period. The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends.

  Further, the access information or the access image may be a one-dimensional code, a multi-dimensional code such as a two-dimensional code, or a URL.

  Further, during the second period (for example, a certain period during the big hit game), not only the access information but also the round display may not be performed, and not only the access information but also a decorative symbol (for example, FIG. 34). “Decoration 4”) may be not displayed, or not only the access information but also the number of outgoing balls may not be displayed.

  In addition, during the third period (for example, a period during the big hit game), the access information is displayed, and a big hit effect (background, audio output, etc.) different from that during the first period may be performed. The same jackpot effect (background, audio output, etc.) as in the first period may be performed along with the display of information, or the effect (eg, jackpot effect) performed during the first period along with the display of access information. ) May be continued.

  In addition, during the second period (for example, a certain period during the jackpot game), the same effect as the first period (for example, the jackpot effect) may be performed without displaying the access information. Without displaying the access information, a part of the same effect as the first period (for example, a big hit effect with the same round display, background, etc.) may be performed.

  The first period may be a period during which at least access information can be displayed without displaying decorative symbols, or a period during which at least a demo screen (customer waiting display) and access information can be displayed. Also good.

  In the second period, not only the demonstration screen but also the access information may not be displayed.

  In addition, during the second period, the access information may overlap with other effects so that at least a part of the access information may be displayed, or only a part of the access information is displayed. The access information may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner, or the access information may not be displayed. In the above mode, the access information is drawn internally (controllably), but the access information is partly or completely hidden from the player by the image drawn on the upper layer. It may be.

  Furthermore, when the access information and other effects overlap, the access information may not be rendered (the access information rendering process is not performed internally (controllably)).

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The access information generating means can generate at least a first access image as the access information,
The access information generating means is capable of generating at least second access information as the access information,
The access image display area of the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first access image during the first period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the second access image during the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first access information and the second access information may be the same access information. By doing this, it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the failure to read the first access information. In addition, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in gaming motivation due to failure to read the first access information.

  The second access information may include at least a part of the first access information. By doing this, it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the failure to obtain the first access information.

  Furthermore, the second access information may be information including the first access information and additional information different from the first access information. Even in this case, it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the failure to read the first access information. In addition, by adding information, the player's willingness to play may be improved.

  Further, the first access information and the second access information may have different appearances or different information. That is, the appearance may be different and the information may be different, either the appearance and the information may be different and the other may be the same, or at least one of the appearance and the information may be May be different.

(Appendix 3)
In the game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The second period is started when a specific condition is satisfied during the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the place where the player inputs information (password input) or reads (reads a two-dimensional code) may be redisplayable even if it disappears under specific conditions. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by being unable to read or reflecting the input.

  Further, the place where the player confirms the information (where no information such as model information, jackpot history, menu screen, etc. is input) may not be displayed again after disappearing under specific conditions. By doing so, the troublesomeness caused by displaying the information to be confirmed may be eliminated.

(Appendix 4)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
Providing production means that can perform production,
The second period is at least started by displaying a specific effect by the effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the specific effect may be a reserved pre-reading effect. The hold prefetch effect here is a prefetch notice effect using a hold icon, and is performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon to the prefetch notice mode. Note that the pre-reading notice is an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur before the symbol variation display to be noticed is started. The reservation pre-reading effect may be started from the time of winning (at the time of holding), or may be started from the middle of the symbol variation display. Further, the hold prefetching effect may be continued until the symbol variation display of the prefetch notice target is started, or may be continued even if the symbol variation display is started. Furthermore, the hold prefetching effect may once disappear on the way.

  The specific effect may be a probable promotion effect. The probable promotion effect is an effect that can notify the game state of the next game, and specifically, it is performed when the confirmed special figure is a probabilistic symbol and the displayed decorative symbol is a non-probable symbol. It is a production that may be heard.

  Furthermore, the specific effect may be an effect performed during symbol variation, for example, an effect or a reach effect indicating the reliability of the variation.

  Thus, even when a specific effect is an advantageous effect for the player, it may be possible to prevent the specific effect from being missed.

(Appendix 5)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The second period starts at least when a specific display is displayed by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first effect may be a first display. Further, the effect means may be an image display means.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine comprising image display means capable of displaying at least an image,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the information during the first period,
The information is not displayed in the information display area during the second period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the information when in the third period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,
The third period is a period that starts after the second period ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The information referred to here may be information input by the player (volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, user menu) or information related to the gaming machine (game flow, game history, etc.).

(Appendix 7)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 6,
The image display means can display at least first information as the information,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least second information as the information,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the first information during the first period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the second information during the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
In the game stand described in appendix 6 or 7,
The second period is started when a specific condition is satisfied during the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 6 to 8,
Providing production means that can perform production,
The second period is at least started by displaying a specific effect by the effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 6 to 9,
The second period starts at least when a specific display is displayed by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The access information may be in any format as long as the data is encoded and visible. The data here is a part of the RAM in the control means (for example, the control circuit on the control board mounted on the game table such as the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc.). Information stored in a region or a plurality of regions may be used, or information related to control by the control unit may be used even if not stored in the RAM.

  When the display condition A is satisfied, the access information may not be displayed in the access image display area even in the first period. When the display condition B is satisfied, the access information may be displayed in the access image display area even in the second period. When the display condition C is satisfied, the access information may not be displayed in the access image display area even in the third period. When the display condition D is satisfied, the access information may be continuously displayed in the access image display area from the first period to the third period. The display condition A is related to one or more of the results of the random number lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the lottery regarding the change of the gaming state such as the probability change / electric support, and the result of the operation to the player. It may be set as appropriate under any conditions. The display condition B is related to one or more of the results of the random number lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the lottery regarding the change in the gaming state such as probability change / electric support, and the operation result to the player. It may be set as appropriate under any conditions. The display condition C is related to one or more of the results of the random number lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the lottery regarding the change of the gaming state such as the probability change / electric support, and the operation result to the player. It may be set as appropriate under any conditions. The display condition D is related to one or more of the results of the random number lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the lottery regarding the change of the gaming state such as probability change / electric support, and the operation result to the player. It may be set as appropriate under any conditions. Any one, a plurality, or all of the display conditions A to D may be satisfied unconditionally.

  The second period may be a period started after the period A started after the first period ends. The third period may be a period started after the period B started after the second period ends.

  In addition, when the period condition A is satisfied, the period B may be started after the first period ends, or the third period can be started. Alternatively, the first period may be started again. When the period condition B is satisfied, the period A may be started after the second period ends, or the first period may be started. Alternatively, the second period may be started again. When the period condition C is established, the period A may be started after the third period ends, or the period B may be configured to be startable. Then, the second period may be configured to be started, or the third period may be configured to be started again. When the period condition D is satisfied, the period A may be started after the third period ends, or the period B may be configured to start. Then, the second period may be configured to be started, or the third period may be configured to be started again.

  The period condition A is related to one or more of the results of the random number lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the lottery regarding the change of the gaming state such as probability change / electric support, and the operation result to the player. It may be set as appropriate under any conditions. The period condition B is related to one or more of the results of the random number lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the lottery regarding the change of the gaming state such as probability change / electric support, and the operation result to the player. It may be set as appropriate under any conditions. The period condition C is related to one or more of the results of the random number lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the lottery regarding the change of the gaming state such as probability change / electric support, and the result of the operation to the player. It may be set as appropriate under any conditions. The period condition D is related to one or more of the results of the random number lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the lottery regarding the change of the gaming state such as probability change / electric support, and the operation result to the player. It may be set as appropriate under any conditions. Any one, a plurality, or all of the period conditions A to D may be satisfied unconditionally.

  Further, access information (for example, the first access image, the second access image, etc.) having a size smaller than the access information (for example, the first access image) displayed in the access image display area in the first period. The third access image) may be displayed in the access image display area in the second period. Further, access information (for example, the first access image, the second access image, etc.) having a size smaller than the access information (for example, the second access image) displayed in the access image display area in the third period. The third access image) may be displayed in the access image display area in the second period. The display position of the access information displayed in the access image display area in the first period may be different from the display position of the access information displayed in the access image display area in the third period. Further, the size of the access information displayed in the access image display area in the first period and the size of the access information displayed in the access image display area in the third period may be different. Further, the color of the access information displayed in the access image display area in the first period may be different from the color of the access information displayed in the access image display area in the third period. The third access image may be different from the first access image (for example, an image or information), or may be the same (image or information). Note that the third access image may be different (image or information) from the second access image, or may be the same (image or information).

  Further, a plurality of pieces of access information may be displayed in the access image display area in the first period. Further, a plurality of pieces of access information may be displayed in the access image display area in the third period. Further, the image display means may be provided with a plurality of access image display areas, or a plurality of access information may be displayed in one access image display area.

  Further, the access information is not necessarily configured to be displayed in the access image display area from the start to the end of the first period, and a part of the first period (for example, the above-described period) Just after the start of the first period, only during the partial period A, the partial period C after the start of the partial period B after the start of the first period, the partial period D before the end of the first period, etc.) It may be possible to display one or a plurality of access information only in the access image display area. Further, the access information is not necessarily configured to be displayed in the access image display region from the start to the end of the third period, and a part of the third period (for example, the above-described period) Just after the start of the third period, only during the partial period E, the partial period G after the start of the partial period F after the start of the third period, the partial period H before the end of the third period, etc.) It may be possible to display one or a plurality of access information only in the access image display area.

  One or a plurality of access information may be displayed in an area other than the access image display area.

(Appendix 12)
Image display means capable of displaying at least an image;
Access information generating means capable of generating at least access information;
Variable entry means,
Directing means;
A game machine equipped with
The variable entry means can change from one of the first state and the second state to the other during the big hit,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state,
The access information is information necessary for a player to access a web page,
The image display means is provided with at least an access image display area,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the access information in the access image display area in the first period during the jackpot,
The first period is a period including a period in which the variable pitching means is in the second state,
The first period is a period including a period in which the variable pitching means is in the first state,
The production means is capable of executing at least a first production,
The access information is not displayed in the access image display area in the second period,
The second period is a period that starts when at least the first effect is executed,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the access information in the access image display area in a third period,
The third period is a period that starts after the second period ends,
The third period is a period in which the first performance is not executed at least.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to appendix 12,
During the jackpot, at least a plurality of rounds are executed,
The plurality of rounds includes a first round;
The plurality of rounds includes a second round;
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The first period includes at least the end timing of the first round,
The first period includes at least the start timing of the second round.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to appendix 12 or 13,
In the first effect, at least a part is displayed in the access image display area in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 12 to 14,
The first effect is a notice effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 12 to 15,
The access information generating means can generate at least a first access image as the access information,
The access information generating means is capable of generating at least a second access image as the access information,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the first access image in the access image display area in the first period,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least the second access image in the access image display area in the third period,
The second access image is the same image as the first access image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 16,
The effect means is capable of executing a second effect,
The game table characterized in that the second effect is executed at least after the first effect is finished.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 12 to 17,
First image display means;
A second image display means;
With
The image display means is one of the first image display means and the second image display means,
The other of the first image display means and the second image display means does not display the access information when the one image display means displays the access information. Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 12 to 18,
The effect means is the same as the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 12 to 19,
The access information is a QR code (registered trademark).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following description, the description in [] is a description showing an example of the correspondence relationship with the specific configuration described in this specification.

(Appendix 21)
A game machine comprising display means [decorative symbol display device 208],
The display means [decorative symbol display device 208] is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays,
The first type of display among the plurality of types of display is a display including at least access information,
The access information is information necessary for accessing a web page.
The display means can display at least one of the first-type displays (hereinafter referred to as “first display” [two-dimensional code]) in the first period [period 4R]. And
The second type of display among the plurality of types of display is a display including at least a second display [round display],
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display [two-dimensional code] in a second period [interval interval period],
The second period is a period that is started after the first period [4R period] ends.
The display means displays the second display [round display] when it is at least one of the first period [period 4R] and the second period [interval interval period]. At least a displayable means,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The gaming machine according to appendix 21,
Variable entry means [variable winning opening 234],
The variable entry means is a means capable of changing from one of the first state [closed state] and the second state [open state] to the other,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first state,
The first period [period 4R] is a period that is at least started in the first case;
The first period [period 4R] is a period that is at least ended in the second case,
In the first case, the variable pitching means [variable winning opening 234] changes from the first state [closed state] to the second state [open state] (hereinafter, “first change”). )
In the second case, the variable pitching means [variable winning opening 234] changes from the second state [open state] to the first state [closed state] (hereinafter, “second change”). )
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to appendix 22,
The second period [interval period between rounds] is a period in which the variable pitching means [variable winning opening 234] is in the first state [closed state],
The second period [interval period between rounds] is a period during which the variable pitching means [variable winning opening 234] does not perform the first change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The game machine according to appendix 22 or appendix 23,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display [two-dimensional code] in a third period [period of 5R],
The third period is a period that is started after the second period [interval period between rounds] ends.
The third period is a period that starts at least in the third case;
The third period is a period that is at least terminated in the fourth case,
The third case is a case where the variable pitching means [variable winning opening 234] performs the first change,
The fourth case is a case where the variable pitching means [variable winning opening 234] performs the second change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 22 to 24,
The variable entry means [variable winning opening 234] is means for at least performing the first change when a big hit is started,
The jackpot period (hereinafter referred to as “fourth period”) is a period including the first period [period 4R],
The fourth period [a jackpot period] is a period including the second period [interval period].
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine according to attachment 25,
The jackpot is composed of a plurality of rounds,
The first period [period 4R] is one of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round” [4 rounds]),
The plurality of rounds includes a second round [5 rounds],
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The second period [inter-round interval period] is a period started after the first round [4 rounds] ends,
The second period [interval interval period] is a period that ends before the second round [5 rounds] is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, in the above description, there is a portion that is limited to “access information”, but it is not limited to “access information”, but may be “information for providing to a player”.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

Subsequently, a pachinko machine 100 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, the description which overlaps with the description so far may be abbreviate | omitted. In addition, components having the same names as the components described so far will be described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.
[Second Embodiment]
The appearance of the pachinko machine 100 in the second embodiment is almost the same as the appearance of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and the configuration of the game board 200 (see FIG. 3) is also almost the same. .

  Also, the circuit configuration of the control unit in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment is roughly divided into the main control unit 300 (main control means), similar to the circuit configuration of the control unit in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. The first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 are configured.

  Also in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, access information (for example, two-dimensional code, color code, URL) is generated.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a QR code (registered trademark) generated as access information in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment.

  FIG. 47A shows a structure of a QR code (registered trademark) (hereinafter referred to as a two-dimensional code).

  The two-dimensional code Q is represented by a combination of cells. This cell is a black and white square and is the smallest unit of the two-dimensional code Q. In the two-dimensional code, rectangular symbols are formed inside the margin Q_1 for four cells. The symbol includes a cut-out symbol Q_2, an alignment pattern Q_3, a timing pattern Q_4, format information Q_5, a data cell Q_6, and the like.

  The cut-out symbol Q_2 is three position detection patterns arranged at the three corners of the rectangular symbol. When reading the two-dimensional code Q, first, the position of the two-dimensional code Q can be recognized by searching for a cut-out symbol, so that high-speed reading is possible.

  The alignment pattern Q_3 corrects a shift in the cell position caused by distortion.

  In the timing pattern Q_4, white cells and black cells are alternately arranged and used to determine module coordinates in the symbol. Timing patterns are arranged in two places.

  The format information Q_5 represents information related to the error correction rate and mask pattern used for the symbol. When performing decoding, first, the format information is read out.

  The two-dimensional code Q can be decoded without losing data even when a part thereof is damaged, and can be decoded even when a maximum of 30% is lost.

  The data cell Q_6 includes information representing numbers, alphanumeric characters, kanji, and binary data.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment can generate and display two-dimensional codes of a plurality of types of formats.

  FIG. 47B shows a two-dimensional code in a gray format. In the description using FIG. 47 (a), it has been described that the cell is a black and white cell.

  FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a two-dimensional code in a format composed of two colors. In the two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 47B, at least the cut-out symbol Q_2 is black, and many other parts have a color (in this case, gray) different from black. However, if the color is light, there is a possibility that it cannot be read, and it is preferable that the color is dark.

  FIG. 47C is a diagram illustrating a two-dimensional code having a format composed of three colors. The two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 47C is divided into three regions, left, middle, and right, and different colors are used for each. The two-dimensional code may be composed of four or more colors.

  FIG. 47D is a diagram illustrating a two-dimensional code in a format in which the background color is configured in a color different from white. The cell color is preferably darker than the background color. The background color may be transparent.

  Next, a process in which a two-dimensional code is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described.

  FIG. 48A is a diagram illustrating a part of a circuit block diagram of the first sub-control unit 400 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment.

  FIG. 48A shows a CPU 404, a RAM 408, a VDP 401, a VDP ROM 403, and a VRAM 405. FIG. 48A also shows a decorative symbol display device 208 that is a liquid crystal display device connected to the VDP 401.

  In generating a two-dimensional code, first, an information command is transmitted from the CPU 404 to the RAM 408. This information command includes user information, play time, number of games, URL, mission achievement status, missed status of a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, the number of missed commands, Information indicating the date the command was missed, the type of command missed, etc.). After transmitting the information command, the CPU 404 transmits a two-dimensional display command to the VDP 401.

  In the RAM 408, data representing a two-dimensional code is generated according to the information included in the information command. The data representing the two-dimensional code is generated by filling the coordinates one dot at a time by the two-dimensional code generation program.

  Data representing the two-dimensional code generated by the RAM 408 is once transmitted to the VDP 401 and then sent from the VDP 401 to the VRAM 405. In the VRAM 405, the data representing the two-dimensional code is transferred to the frame buffer in the VRAM 436 in accordance with the coordinate axis (rotation), image size (enlargement / reduction), VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc. of the VRAM 436, and drawing data of the two-dimensional code Is generated. In this way, the drawing process of the two-dimensional code is completed, drawing data is sent from the VRAM 436 to the decorative design display device 208 via the VDP 401, and the two-dimensional code is displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  Instead of generating data representing a two-dimensional code in the RAM 408, data representing a two-dimensional code may be stored in advance in the VDP ROM 403, and the VDP 401 may select from the ROM 403 and perform the drawing process. .

  Further, the information command may be transmitted all at once, or may be transmitted in a plurality of times.

  Furthermore, if a two-dimensional display command is transmitted before the information command is transmitted, it is determined that an error has occurred and a two-dimensional code may not be generated. ), A predetermined image (for example, “×”) may be generated by the two-dimensional code generation program, and an error image stored in the ROM 403 is selected. Then, a drawing process may be performed. In addition, when the information command is transmitted in multiple times (for example, 4 times) and the two-dimensional display command is transmitted before all the commands divided in the multiple times are transmitted (for example, 3 / The case where the two-dimensional display command is transmitted in a state where the information command is transmitted up to 4) may be the same as the case where the information command is transmitted at a time.

  FIG. 48B is a diagram showing a modification of the circuit block diagram shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 48A, the VDP 401 and the like for performing the drawing process are provided in the first sub-control unit 400. However, in the modification shown in FIG. 48B, these are separated from the first sub-control unit 400. Provided.

  In FIG. 48B, the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal display device control unit 450 are provided separately. A CPU 404 is shown in the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 48B, and a CPU 451 is also shown in the liquid crystal display device control unit 450. In addition to the CPU 451, the liquid crystal display control unit 450 is provided with a RAM 452, a VDP 453, a VDP ROM 454, and a VRAM 455. In the modification shown in FIG. 5B, in generating the two-dimensional code, an information command is transmitted from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 to the CPU 451 of the liquid crystal display device control unit 450, and the liquid crystal display device control unit 450 The CPU 451 functions as a substitute for the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG.

  Next, the VDP 401, the VDP ROM 403, and the VRAM 405 shown in FIG.

  First, the internal configurations of the VDP ROM 403 and VRAM 405 will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 403 and the VRAM 405 before image data is expanded in the VRAM 405.

  The first sub-control unit 400 reads a VDP ROM 403 for storing image data, a VRAM 405 for temporarily storing image data, etc., and a storage area of the VRAM 405 by reading the image data stored in the ROM 403 And a VDP 401 that generates a display image using and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The ROM 403 stores in advance image data such as compressed movie data (compressed moving image data) and texture data composed of still images.

  The VRAM 405 has a movie data expansion area for temporarily storing (developing) movie data, a texture data expansion area for temporarily storing (developing) texture data, and a decorative symbol display device 208. A frame buffer 1 (FB1) and a frame buffer 2 (FB2) for temporarily storing (developing) image data corresponding to an image to be displayed are provided. Note that the frame buffer 1 (FB1) and the frame buffer 2 (FB2) are configured so that one of a drawing area and a display area can be specified, and image data is developed in the frame buffer specified in the drawing area. By changing the designation from the drawing area to the display area, an image corresponding to the image data stored in the frame buffer designated in the display area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. The VRAM 405 may be configured to be included in the VDP 401, and the ROM 403 may be configured to be included in the VDP 401.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 403 and the VRAM 405 after image data is expanded in the VRAM 405. The first sub-control unit 400 performs initial transfer processing of movie data and texture data after power is turned on or reset.

  More specifically, in the initial transfer process of movie data, the development data provided for each type of control information (for example, for each resolution) in the movie data development area according to the control information of the movie data stored in the ROM 403. Set the area. In the texture data initial transfer process, all texture data stored in the ROM 403 is transferred (developed) to the texture data development area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs steady transfer processing of movie data after the initial transfer processing. Specifically, in the regular transfer process of movie data, the movie data corresponding to the movie to be played is decompressed into a plurality of image data out of the movie data stored in the ROM 403, and then the decompressed image data is one frame. Each time it is transferred (expanded) to the movie data expansion area. If the resolution of the decompressed image data and the resolution of the movie data development area are different, the image data is transferred (expanded) after performing processing such as enlargement / reduction.

  Next, image drawing processing performed by the first sub-control unit 400 will be described in detail.

  When playing back a movie, the first sub-control unit 400 decompresses the movie data into a plurality of image data, and then transfers the decompressed image data to the movie data development area frame by frame.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 uses the frame buffer 1 (FB1) or the frame buffer 2 (FB2) of the VRAM 405 based on the movie data transferred to the movie data development area (for example, resolution 1280 × 1024). In order to form a display image, information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM 405 coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) is instructed to the VDP 401.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 designates the frame buffer in which the display image is formed and performs a drawing instruction. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the drawing instruction. As a result, an image corresponding to the movie data is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is configured to display an image based on a signal from the VDP 401. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 is based on the RGB signal, the data enable signal (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “RGBDE signal”), and the CLK signal (for example, dot clock signal) that are signals output from the VDP 401. The image can be displayed. Here, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal panel capable of displaying an image of 1280 pixels in width and 800 pixels in length, but may be a display panel having another configuration.

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 in the second embodiment are stopped using FIGS. 51 (a) to (d). The types of special maps and general maps to be displayed will be described.

  FIG. 51 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 51 (a), six types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F" are shown.

  In the second embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D") are prepared as the stop symbol form of Special Figure 1. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol (suddenly probable). When these symbols (special drawings A and C) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure B” is a 15R big hit symbol (15R normal big hit). When this special figure B is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol (hidden probability variation). If the special figure D is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state.

  In addition, a special symbol 1 is provided with a small symbol (special symbol E) stop symbol in addition to the big bonus symbol. Furthermore, the special figure F is a lost symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are also prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and other symbols such as 15R normal jackpot symbols and 15R jackpot symbols are also available. It is the same.

  FIG. 51 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. In FIG. 51 (b), four types of special maps "Special Figure a", "Special Figure b", "Special Figure c", and "Special Figure d" are shown. That is, in special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols ("special figure a", "special figure b", and "special figure c") are prepared. “Special Figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol. When these symbols (special drawings a and b) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure c” is also a big hit symbol of 8 rounds (8R normal big hit), but when special figure c is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Special figure 2 does not have a small hit symbol, and “Special figure d” is a lost symbol.

  Special figure high probability "Special figure A", "Special figure C", or "Special figure a", "Special figure b", which are high probability (with probability change and electric support), are stopped and displayed After the jackpot game is finished, the power support state (ordinary high probability state) is maintained until the next jackpot game is started, and the special figure has a low probability general figure high probability (with no power change support). When B or special figure c is displayed in a stopped state, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure variable game is executed 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed. (Transfer to the low probability state).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous for the player than the special figure 1 (for example, there are more balls).

  FIG. 51 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are also ten types of decoration patterns of the second embodiment, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”.

  When reporting 15R special big hit ("Special Figure A"), 15R normal big hit ("Special Figure B"), 8R special big hit ("Special Figure b"), or 8R normal big hit ("Special Figure c") In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of three decorative symbols in which the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. . Of these combinations of decorative symbols, combinations of decorative symbols in which three of the same odd number of decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Is displayed only in the case of 15R special big hit which is "Special Figure A" or 16R special big hit which is "Special Figure a". If so, it is a combination of a decorative pattern with 16R probability variation and a big hit. Furthermore, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure D") and the small hit symbol ("Special Figure E") in the special figure 1, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When a combination of decorative symbols such as "" is stopped and displayed, and a sudden probability change ("Special C") in Special Figure 1 is notified, "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the combination of decorative symbols.

  Also in the second embodiment, the stop symbol mode (see FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b)) of the special symbols 1 and 2 and the symbol display areas 208a to the middle left and right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop symbol mode (see (c) in the figure) of one decorative symbol displayed in c is larger in the decorative symbol (see (c) in the same figure).

  FIG. 51 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. In the second embodiment, there are two types of stop display modes for ordinary maps: “Urban diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “Urban diagram B” which is a missed symbol.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  52 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and A normal symbol hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the center portion of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 52 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the first special symbol holding lamp 218 but also by the number of holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is determined by the second special symbol holding lamp 220. In addition to the number of lighting, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 52A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 52A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 52 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the second special figure start port 232. It is because it is in a state. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208, does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is the left side of the variable icon display area 280. It is displayed in (effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance.

  In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → start animation movement or deletion of the hold icon → decorative symbol variation start. Although this is done, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 52 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 52 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 52 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 52 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, in FIG. 52 (f), the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 52 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 52 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, a reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P as shown in FIG. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 52 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the vehicle enters the reach state as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 52 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Also, the decorative symbol variation display that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208 so far has moved to the lower right corner and is displayed in a reduced size in FIG. 52 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  53 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 53 (p) continuing from FIG. 52 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 53 (s). In FIG. 53 (s), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 53 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 5 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (v), the combination of the decorative symbol of 15R special jackpot of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG.53 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 53 (v), the background is not displayed, but a background image different from the default is actually displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 53 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is made along with a background image (not shown here) that celebrates the big hit.

  On the other hand, when a reach state is reached with a different decorative symbol (a symbol combination that is a normal big hit or a probable big hit) in FIG. 52 (l), in FIG. 53 (u) ′ in another case continued from FIG. 53 (t), In FIG. 53 (v) ′ subsequent to FIG. 53 (u) ′, the fluctuation of the decoration pattern combination “decoration 6” − “decoration 6” − “decoration 6” is displayed. “-Decoration 6” is a combination of big hits of decorative symbols. Then, in FIG. 53 (w) ′ following FIG. 53 (v) ′, “big hit” is displayed as a big hit game start effect together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 53 (q) step by step.

  In FIG. 54 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 52 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 54 (b). In FIG. 54 (b), the main character, Tono-sama loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 54 (c), as in FIG. 53 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 54 (d), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) in FIG. 1 is turned on, and the decorative symbol of “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is lost. The combination of is stopped. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the jackpot game will be described in detail.

  FIG. 55A is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of the big hit game.

  In FIG. 55 (a), in order from the top, a special symbol changing signal, a condition device operating signal, an accessory continuous operating device operating signal, a special electric accessory releasing signal, a special electric accessory operating signal, an attacker, an attacker A solenoid signal is shown.

  Special symbol changing signal, condition device activation signal, accessory continuous activation device activation signal, special electric accessory release signal, special electric accessory activation signal are signals as seen from the game rules. If it is on, the special symbol display device is in operation, and if it is off, it is inactive (stopped). If the condition device activation signal is on, the attacker is operating (opening operation, maintaining the open state, closing operation, maintaining the closed state), and if off, it is not operating (closing). In addition, if the accessory continuous operation device activation signal is ON, the special electric accessory has been activated a plurality of times. The special electric accessory release signal is a signal that maintains the open state of the special electric accessory. If the special electric accessory operating signal is on, the attacker is in the opening operation, maintaining the open state, or in the closing operation, and if off, the attacker is in the closing state.

  The “opening” of the attacker shown in FIG. 55A corresponds to the opening operation or maintaining the open state, and the “closing” of the attacker corresponds to the closing operation or maintaining the closed state. Also, the attacker solenoid signal shown in FIG. 55A is a signal for maintaining the open state, which is transmitted to the solenoid that opens and closes the attacker.

  An arrow A in FIG. 55 (a) corresponds to the fixed display time of the special symbol stop symbol. The arrow B corresponds to a jackpot game start effect time (a jackpot start display time). Arrow C corresponds to the closing operation time of the attacker. The arrow D corresponds to a jackpot game end effect time (a jackpot end display time). The arrow E corresponds to the special display fluctuation display waiting time, and when there is a special figure 1 or special figure 2 suspension, the special symbol fluctuation starts after the fluctuation display start waiting time elapses. See the dotted line part of the signal).

  The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the special figure changing signal is turned off, the timing when the condition device activation signal is turned on, or the accessory continuous actuation device activation signal is It may be the timing when the special electric accessory release signal is first turned on, or the timing when the special electric accessory operating signal is first turned on. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the attacker starts the first opening, or the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is first turned on.

  On the other hand, the end timing of the jackpot game may be the timing when the condition device operation signal is turned off, the timing when the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is turned off, or the condition device operation signal. And / or when the accessory continuous actuating device activation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the special electric accessory release signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device activation signal and / or the instrument continuous signal When the actuator activation signal is on, it may be the timing when the special electric instrument operating signal is finally turned off from the on state, or the condition apparatus activation signal and / or the accessory continuous actuator activation signal may be In the case of being on, it may be the timing when the attacker finally goes from “open” to “closed”, condition device activation signal and / or accessory continuous When the motion device activation signal is on, it may be the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device activation signal and / or the accessory continuous operation device activation signal is turned off. Therefore, it may be the timing when the variable waiting time has elapsed.

  FIG. 55 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by an ellipse indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 55 (a).

  Even when the special electric accessory release signal is turned off, the special electric accessory operating signal is on for a while (here, the period of the arrow a). During the period indicated by the arrow a, the attacker performs a closing operation, and an opening end effect (for example, a display effect) of the attacker is executed. Note that the period indicated by the arrow a may be only the period during which the attacker performs the closing operation. The period of the arrow b elapses from when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off to when it is turned on. The interval between rounds corresponding to the interval between rounds may be a period indicated by an arrow b shown in FIG. 55 (b), or a period obtained by combining the arrows a and b shown in FIG. May be.

  The attacker open period (open state maintaining period) shown in FIG. 55 corresponds to a period (long period) in which a game ball can easily enter. Hereinafter, the attacker open period may be referred to as a packer. On the other hand, there are cases in which the attacker's release period is a period (short period) in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Hereinafter, the attacker's release period may be referred to as a packer.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the state of the 15R special big hit game in stages.

  56 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and A normal symbol hold lamp 216 is shown. FIG. 56 also shows a variable winning opening 234 that is an attacker and a door member 2341.

  In FIG. 56 (a), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit. In addition, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the 4th symbol display area 284 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 56 (b), one round, which is the first round of 15 round jackpot games, is started. The door member 2341 shown in FIG. 56 (b) is opened, and the attacker is in the open state. In addition, 1R character display (round number display) is performed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (b). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa that imitates a cactus appears as a big hit game effect, and an effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 is performed. In addition, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This “decoration 7” continues to be displayed until the big hit game end effect is started. Therefore, it continues to be displayed even in the interval between rounds.

  Also in FIG. 56C, the door member 2341 is open, and the attacker is in the open state. In addition, the round number display is continued in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display dedicated to the first round is also continued.

  In FIG. 56 (d), the door member 2341 is closed and the attacker is in the closed state. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 1R characters in the upper left corner and “decoration 7” in the upper right corner. Furthermore, the effect display for the first round is also continued. One scene of the effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 (one scene with a different number of brilliant images br) shown in FIG. 56D corresponds to the opening end effect of the attacker in the first round. .

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 56 (e), the 1R character display at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and in FIG. 56 (f), the second round is started. The door member 2341 shown in FIG. 5F is opened and the attacker is in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has an effect display for the second round including the character C1 (the number of brilliant images br is the number of images). A different production display) has been started. However, the display of the number of rounds in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has not started. The period of FIG. 56 (e) may be an interval between rounds, and the effect display including the character C1 shown in FIGS. 56 (d) to 56 (e) is regarded as the effect of the interval between rounds. ) To (e) may be set as an interval between rounds.

  Also in FIG. 56G, the attacker is in an open state, and the round number display is started at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the third to fifth rounds are digested in the same manner, and in FIG. 56 (h), the fifth time that the attacker opened state is maintained and the attacker is still in the closed state, and the round in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is maintained. The number display also disappears. In FIG. 6 (i), the sixth round is started, the attacker is in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the effect display dedicated to the sixth round including the character C1. Also in FIG. 6J, the attacker is in an open state, and 6R character display is started at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the continuation of the 15R special jackpot game shown in FIG. 56 in stages.

  In FIG. 57 (k) following FIG. 56 (j), the sixth round of big hit game is being performed, and in FIG. 57 (l), the sixth time that the attacker is in an open state is over and the attacker remains in a closed state. In FIG. 57 (m), the round number display in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also turned off.

  In FIG. 57 (n), the seventh round is started, the attacker is in an open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started an effect display dedicated to the seventh round including the character C1. Also in FIG. 5 (o), the attacker is in an open state, and the 7R character display is started at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the 8th to 14th rounds are digested in the same manner. In FIG. 57 (p), the big hit game of the 15th round, which is the final round, is being performed and the attacker is in an open state. A 15R character is displayed in the upper left corner, and an effect display dedicated to the 15th round is also performed.

  In FIG. 57 (q), the door member 2341 is closed, and the attacker is in the closed state. In FIG. 57 (r), the character display of 15R at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and FIG. ), The jackpot game end effect is started. In this big hit game end effect, the character of the main character appears in a dedicated background image (not shown here), and the character display of “probability change entry” is displayed. This character display notifies that the control state shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state and electric support state) when the jackpot game is finished.

  FIG. 57 (t) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special display variable display start waiting time indicated by the arrow E in FIG. 55 (a), and the control state shifts to the probability change state and the electric support state. doing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6 (t), the character display “probably changing” is made in the upper left, and the display of the variation icon display region 280 and the fourth symbol display region 284 is restored. Further, due to the shift to the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d (left side of the fluctuation icon display area 280). In FIG. 57 (t), the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, as can be seen from the number of lighting of the second special symbol hold lamp 220, but there are four hold icons in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In order to make it easy to understand that the icon is displayed, the hold icon that is not actually displayed is indicated by a dotted line in the default display mode.

  As described above, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. 57 (t), a dotted line is used to make the area easy to understand. This area corresponds to the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. In FIG. 57 (t), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is four as can be seen from the number of lighting of the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and four hold icons h11 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. ˜h14 is displayed.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the steps from the start of the 15R normal big hit game to the end of the electric support state.

  58, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and A normal symbol hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In FIG. 58 (a), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit. In addition, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the 4th symbol display area 284 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 58 (b), the first round of the 15 round jackpot game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 1R characters in the upper left corner, and the first round including the character C1. Dedicated display is performed.

  Thereafter, rounds 2 to 14 are digested, and in FIG. 58 (c), the 15th time that the attacker is open is ended, and the 15R character display displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. In FIG. 58 (d), the big hit game end effect is started. In this jackpot game end effect, a special background image (not shown here) is displayed with the characters “short time entry”. The character display here notifies that the control state shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (non-probability change state and electric support state) when the jackpot game is finished.

  FIG. 58 (e) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special display variable display start waiting time indicated by the arrow E in FIG. 55 (a), and the control state is the non-probable change state and the electric support state. It has migrated. The electric support state here is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 100 times after the big hit game is finished, and the 101st time shifts to the non-electric support state (ordinary figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5E, the display of the variable icon display region 280 and the fourth symbol display region 284 is restored. Further, due to the shift to the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d (left side of the fluctuation icon display area 280). Also in FIG. 58 (e), as in FIG. 57 (t), the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 0 as can be seen from the number of lighting of the second special symbol holding lamp 220, but the holding icon display of special figure 2 In order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the area 282, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by dotted lines in the default display mode. Similarly to FIG. 57 (t), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but it is easy to understand the area. Are indicated by dotted lines, and four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG.

  In FIG. 58 (e), the first special symbol variation after the end of the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the decorative symbol variation display. The hold icon in the special figure 1 is reduced by one, and the current control state of “99 times after the shortage” and the remaining number of fluctuations in which the control state is maintained are displayed at the upper end of the decorative symbol display device 208. . Further, in FIG. 58 (e), the usual fluctuation display is also started. Therefore, in the 4th symbol display area 284, only the 4th symbol of the special figure 2 is lit.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is repeated, but the losing continues, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (f) performs the symbol variation display of the special symbol for the 100th time after the big hit game ends. Yes. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the four hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 as well. Any of the hold icons is a default display mode, and the display modes of the hold icons h21 to h24 in the special figure 2 are all square non-patterned and white display modes, and the display form of the hold icon in the special figure 1 is Both are round, non-patterned and white display modes. Note that the hold icon may be displayed in a display mode of a prefetch notice different from the default display mode. Further, in the special figure 2 priority variation machine, during the power support state, the hold icon may be displayed in the prefetch notice display mode only in the special figure 2 of the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (g), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Eventually, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation fluctuation ends, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and then as shown in FIG. 58 (i). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character for notifying that the electric saho state (short time state) has ended. Further, in this example, the number of balls obtained during the electric support state is also displayed. The number of balls to be played here may be a true value or a false value. In addition, the variation time in the last variation of the electric support state may be selected in advance, or the fixed time of the special figure may be set longer than in other cases.

  In FIG. 58 (j), the combination display of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7” is confirmed. In this example, the display position of the hold icon display area is set according to the control state (game state) in the next change at the final display stage in the 100th symbol variation display, not at the same time as the start of the 101st symbol variation display. Switch to the displayed position. That is, in the next change, since the transition to the non-electric support state is made, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (j), the display position of the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 and the hold icon in FIG. The display position of the display area 282 is switched, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed at the right end. Note that this display position switching may be performed in synchronization with the transition of the control state. That is, it may be performed simultaneously with the start of the 101st symbol variation display. Alternatively, the transition of the control state itself may be advanced so that it is performed at the final display stage in the 100th symbol variation display, and the display position may be switched simultaneously with the 100th final display as shown in FIG. As shown in the example shown in FIG. 58, the display position can be reduced by placing another display screen (here, the display screen shown in FIG. 58 (j)) in between. There is a case.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example in which a two-dimensional code is displayed in a big hit game in stages.

  FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram showing a state corresponding to FIG. 56 (b). In this example, 15R special jackpot is won. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59A, the two-dimensional code Q11 that was not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56B is displayed in the lower right. The two-dimensional code Q11 displayed here may include a URL of a Web page that informs that 15 rounds are won instead of 2 rounds, or n times (15th) It may include a URL of a Web page notifying that the mission achieved by winning is cleared, or a URL of a Web page on which content such as an image for a two-dimensional code is displayed. It may be included. Further, in this example, when the first round is started, the two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed. However, this may be displayed when the mission is completed, or may be displayed by another opportunity (for example, production) It may be displayed when the button 136 is pressed).

  FIG. 59B is a diagram illustrating a state corresponding to FIG. 56J, and the two-dimensional code Q11 whose display is started in FIG. 59A is still displayed. FIG. 59 (c) and subsequent figures show states corresponding to FIG. 57, but the two-dimensional code Q11 whose display is started in FIG. 59 (a) is continuously displayed. In this example, the two-dimensional code is displayed. Q11 is continuously displayed from the start of the first round until the big hit game end effect is started. That is, the two-dimensional code Q11 continues to be displayed during the round interval.

  In this example, the two-dimensional code Q11 and the jackpot game effect image do not overlap, but even if they overlap, the jackpot game effect may be slightly changed to avoid overlapping.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state in which a two-dimensional code is displayed when an effect button 136 is pressed during a big hit game. The example shown in FIG. 60 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 59, and will be described focusing on the differences from FIG.

  A notification image 2072 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 to display a two-dimensional code is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. This notification image 2072 is larger than the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. That is, the horizontal width of the notification image 2072 is longer than the horizontal width of the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 60B and subsequent figures, a part of the big hit game effect is overlapped by the notification image 2072. That is, the brilliant image br and part of the character C1 itself are hidden by the notification image 2072. However, the notification image 2072 is a transparent image, and a part of the big hit game effect is faintly seen through the notification image 2072. Note that the notification image 2072 may be an impermeable image. Conversely, part or all of the notification image 2072 may be overlapped by part or all of the jackpot game effect.

  The notification image 2072 here continues to be displayed until the effect button 136 is pressed. That is, the notification image 2072 continues to be displayed during the round interval. However, in this example, even if the effect button 136 is not pressed, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), the notification image 2072 disappears when the fifteenth attacker open state maintenance is completed. When the effect button 136 is not pressed, the notification image 2072 may be continuously displayed until the big hit game end effect is started.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example when the notification image shown in FIG. 60 is displayed and the effect button 136 is pressed. Here, it demonstrates centering on difference with the example shown in FIG.

  61 correspond to the alphabets attached to the respective drawings in FIG. 60.

In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect button 136 is pressed in the middle of the sixth round. Then, the notification image 2072 disappears, and a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed in the central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 includes a two-dimensional code Q11 and a character display that recommends acquiring the two-dimensional code Q11 (“GET two-dimensional code”). This two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 corresponds to an example of a first type of display. The two-dimensional code Q11 itself may be the first type of display. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is an impermeable image and overlaps a part of the big hit game effect. That is, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 hides a portion of the big hit game effect, making it difficult to see the big hit game effect. Note that the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 may overlap all of the jackpot game effects.
The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed until the fifteenth attacker open state maintenance is completed, as shown in FIGS. 61 (h) and (i). That is, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed during the round interval. Note that the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 may be continuously displayed until the big hit game end effect is started.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the second effect movable body is operated during the big hit game.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment is provided with a second effect movable body 247 that operates on the player side (front side) with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second effect movable body 247, the movable portion 2471 representing the family crest can be operated, and the operating range completely exceeds the decorative symbol display device 208 from the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. Between the wrapping positions. That is, the second effect movable body 247 can perform a lifting operation. The operating range may be between a position that overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 from a position that is out of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second effect movable body 247 is also driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing a state of the sixth round in the jackpot game started by stopping and displaying the combination of the 15-hound jackpot decoration symbols of “decoration 6”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”. It is. “Decoration 6” is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62A, and a jackpot game effect in which the character C1 appears is also executed. Also, a notification image 2072 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 to display the two-dimensional code is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, during the sixth round, the movable portion 2471 representing the family crest stored in the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered to the player side than the decorative symbol display device 208. (See FIG. 62B and FIG. 62C). Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the movable portion 2471 descends to the maximum descending position. The maximum descending position of the movable portion 2471 is a position that almost completely overlaps the central portion in the left-right direction on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 62 (d), the big hit game displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Most of the effects are hidden by the movable portion 2471, and the notification image 2072 is almost hidden by the movable portion 2471. The display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also overlapped by a part of the arm portion 2472 connected to the movable portion 2471. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image 2074 is displayed at a position corresponding to the periphery of the movable portion 2471 lowered to the maximum lowered position. A part of this effect image 2074 also overlaps with the notification image 2072, but the effect image 2074 here is a transparent image, and the notification image 2072 looks faint. The effect image 2074 may be an impermeable image. In addition, a part of the effect image 2074 overlaps the display of the number of rounds in the upper left and the display of “decoration 6” in the upper right.

  The movable portion 2471 that has been lowered to the maximum lowering position starts to rise toward the initial position before the end of the sixth round (see FIG. 62E and FIG. 62F). The effect image 2074 disappears in synchronization with the start of raising of the movable unit 2471, and the characters “probability change” are additionally displayed below the display of “decoration 6” on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The above-described effect using the second effect movable body 247 corresponds to a probability change promotion effect. In the combination of the decoration pattern “decoration 6”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”, the player was unable to determine whether it was a normal big hit or a special big hit (probable big hit). By displaying the letters, you can see that you have won the probable big hit. Even if the movable portion 247 moves up and down, there may be a case where the additional display of the word “probability change” is not performed.

  In FIG. 62 (g), the movable portion 2471 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the second effect movable body is operated while the two-dimensional code is displayed.

  In this example, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 may be displayed at the start of the first round in the jackpot game, or the effect button according to the notification image 2072 displayed when the sixth round is started It may be a case where 136 is pressed and the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed. The displayed two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is continuously displayed during the big hit game. That is, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds or during the period in which the attacker is released, and disappears when the big hit game end effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63A, a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed so as to overlap the display of the sixth round jackpot game effect.

  In FIG. 63 (b), the probability variation promotion effect is started. That is, as in FIG. 62B, the movable portion 2471 representing the family crest descends. The movable portion 2471 shown in FIG. 63 (b) has fallen only to the extent that it slightly overlaps the two-dimensional code Q11. In this state, the two-dimensional code Q11 can be read.

  The movable part 2471 shown in FIG. 63 (c) has dropped to the extent that it overlaps more than half of the two-dimensional code Q11, and in this state, the two-dimensional code Q11 cannot be read.

  The state shown in FIG. 63 (d) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 62 (d), and the two-dimensional code Q11 is entirely covered by the movable portion 2471 lowered to the maximum lowered position. This is a state in which the existence of Q11 itself is unknown.

  Thereafter, the movable portion 2471 lowered to the maximum descending position starts to rise toward the initial position before the end of the sixth round, as in FIGS. 62 (e) to (f) (FIG. 63 (e)). (See FIG. 63 (f)) and FIG. 63 (g), the movable portion 2471 is returned to the initial position. The two-dimensional code Q11 can be read if it can be visually recognized by 70% or more.

  As described above, the second effect movable body 247 is displayed even when the two-dimensional code Q11 is not displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 62) (the example shown in FIG. 63). Even if).

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the effect movable body simulating a human right arm is performed during a big hit game.

  The effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 64 is arranged on the player side (front side) with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208 and on the right side with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208. The operating range of the effect movable body 224 is a range outside the decorative symbol display device 208, and a part of the effect movable member 224 does not overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 64A, the forearm 224a is rotated about 90 degrees. The upper arm 224b of the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position, and in FIG. 64, the initial position of the forearm 224a is indicated by a dotted line. Also, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (a) is similar to the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (a), in which “decoration 6” is displayed on the upper right, and the jackpot game in which the character C1 appears. Production is also performed. Furthermore, a notification image 2072 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 to display the two-dimensional code is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notification image 2072 is not hidden by the rotated forearm portion 224a, and is all visible.

  Here, an unillustrated effect button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notification image 2072 disappears, and a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed in the central portion (see FIG. 64B). The forearm portion 224a is still in a position rotated about 90 degrees, but the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is not hidden by the rotated forearm portion 224a, and is entirely visible.

  64 (a) ′ is a modified example of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 64 (b) ′ is a modified example of FIG. 64 (b) and is an example following FIG. 64 (a) ′. .

  In this modified example, the effect image 2075 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the operation of the effect movable body 224 (here, the rotation of the forearm portion 224a). Also in FIG. 64 (a) ′, the notification image 2072 is not hidden by the rotated forearm 224a, but is overlapped by the effect image 2075, leaving a small part on the lower side, and is not visible. It is. In addition, most of the jackpot game effects in which the character C1 appears are overlapped by the effect image 2075.

  Also in FIG. 64 (b) ′ in which the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed, the effect image 2075 remains displayed, and a part of the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 displayed later (two-dimensional code) Q11 itself is entirely overlapped by the previously displayed effect image 2075 and is not visible.

  The effect movable body 224 can operate even when the two-dimensional code Q11 is not displayed. The case where the two-dimensional code Q11 is not displayed here is not limited to the case where a big hit game is being played as in the example shown in FIG. 62. For example, the two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed during the symbol variation display of the special figure. The two-dimensional code Q11 may not be displayed during the demonstration. Moreover, all the operations of the effect movable body 224 may be performed (both the forearm portion 224a and the upper arm portion 224b are rotated).

As described above, in the description using FIGS.
“Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
Movable means [for example, production movable body 224 or second production movable body 247];
Variable entry means [eg, attacker 234];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
The first type of the plurality of types of display is a display [for example, two-dimensional code acquisition promoting image 2073 or two-dimensional code Q11] including at least access information [for example, URL],
The variable entry means is a means capable of changing at least from one state of the first state [eg, closed state] and the second state [eg, open state] to the other state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means displays one of the first-type displays in the first period (hereinafter referred to as “first display” [for example, two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 or two-dimensional code Q11]). Is a means capable of displaying at least,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period,
The first period is a period [for example, a period of an interval between rounds] in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state.
The second period is a period during which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state [for example, a period during which the attacker opens state is maintained]
The movable means is a means that at least a part may operate at least in the first case,
The movable means is a means that at least a part may operate at least in the second case,
The first case is a case where at least the first display is displayed on the display means [for example, the case shown in FIG. 63],
The second case is a case where at least the first display is not displayed on the display means [for example, the case shown in FIG. 62].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics. In some cases, the player can check the access information displayed on the display means regardless of the operation status of the movable means.

  The variable pitching means may be capable of changing from one of the first state and the second state to the other during the big hit, for example, an attacker. Good.

  Further, the variable entry means is more easily changed from the first state to the second state in the electric support state (short-time state) than in the non-electric support state (non-time-short state). For example, an electric chew may be used.

  The first period may include a period in which the variable pitching means is in a third state (for example, a half-open state). The first period may be a so-called round interval period.

  The second period may include a period in which the variable pitching means is in the first state. For example, the second period may include a period in which the variable pitching means repeats the first state and the second state alternately (for example, a period of a packer packer).

  At least a part of the movable unit may be a unit that may operate regardless of whether or not the first display is displayed on the display unit.

  All of the movable means (for example, both the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b) may operate, or only a part (for example, only the forearm 224b) may operate.

  In addition, “means capable of changing at least from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state” means any one of the first state and the second state. It may be means that can be changed only from one state to the other state, or from one state of the plurality of states including the first state and the second state to the first state and the second state Means capable of changing to the other state among a plurality of states including Here, the plurality of states may include a third state (half-open state), or may include a closed state, an open state, an open state, and a closed state. Also, one state may indicate a state different from the other state, or one state may indicate the same state as the other state.

  Further, “a state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning means” may indicate a state in which the game ball easily enters the variable winning means.

  The “first type of display” may indicate a display composed of only the display of the access information, or one or a plurality of displays (images different from the access information display and the access information). Display or character display).

  Further, the “period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state” may indicate only the period in which the variable pitching means is in the first state, or the control means may be in the first state. Or the control means is instructed to transition to the first state (for example, a closing signal is transmitted) and then instructed to transition to the second state (for example, open) It may be a period until a signal is transmitted). The “period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state” may indicate only the period in which the variable pitching means is in the second state, or the control means enters the second state. The period during which the transition to the second state is instructed by the control means until the transition to the first state is instructed may be used.

  “The movable means may operate at least partially in the first case” may indicate that the movable means operates in one or a plurality of cases different from the first case. It may be shown that it operates only in one case. “The movable means may operate at least partially in the second case” may indicate that the movable means operates in one or a plurality of cases different from the second case. It may be shown that it operates only in the second case.

  “At least the first display is displayed” may indicate that only the first display is displayed, or one or more displays different from the first display are displayed. It may indicate the state of being. Here, “one or more displays different from the first display” may indicate that one or more displays different from the first display of the first type display are displayed. One or more types of display (second type display) may be displayed, and both the first type display and the second type display different from the first type may be displayed. May be displayed in plural.

  As for the above-mentioned remarks, a game table characterized by “~” described later. The same applies to the above.

Also,
“The first period [for example, the period of the interval between rounds] is a period that is started at least after the second period [for example, the period during which the attacker opens state is maintained].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is no need for a gaming operation (for example, ball launching) during the first period, so that it may be easier for the player to check the display related to the access information.

  The first period may be a period that starts only after (or immediately after) the second period. The first period may be a period that starts after (or immediately after) one or more periods different from the second period. That is, another period may be sandwiched between the first period and the second period.

Also,
"The movable means is means provided at least on the player side than the display means,
At least a part of the movable means is a means that overlaps at least a part of the display means in the third case,
The third case is one of the first case and the second case,
The third case is when at least a part of the movable means [for example, the movable portion 2471] moves [for example, when it is lowered].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case in which at least a part of the movable means overlaps at least a part of the display means so that the player's line of sight can be noticed around the display means. Further, by focusing attention on the player's line of sight around the display means, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display related to the access information.

  In addition, an overlap is the state which covers at least one part of the said display means from the player side, for example.

  The third case may be a case where at least a part of the movable means moves from a position not overlapping with at least a part of the display means to a position where it overlaps.

  Further, “provided at least on the player side with respect to the display means” means provided on the player side with respect to the display means, and one or more other means (for example, a glass window, a light guide plate, a reinforcing transparent plate) (PM plate), one or a plurality of movable means different from the movable means, a door body, etc.) may be on the board side (opposite to the player side). Alternatively, the movable means may be provided closer to the player than all the means including the display means. For example, the movable means may be a movable display means provided on the door body.

  In addition, the “means that overlaps at least a part of the display means” may be a means that overlaps the entire display means, or a means that overlaps only a part of the display means. It may be a means that overlaps a part or all of the display means and one or more means different from the display means.

  Also, “at least a part of the movable means overlaps at least a part of the display means in the third case” means that part or all of the movable means is more than part or all of the display means. It may indicate a state of being arranged on the (close to) side, or may indicate a state in which a part or all of the movable means is arranged at a position overlapping with part or all of the display means. Alternatively, it may be indicated that a part or all of the movable means overlaps with a part or all of the display means to hide a part or all of the display means.

Also,
“When the variable pitching means is in a second gaming state [eg, a big hit gaming state], at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state. Is a changeable means,
The second gaming state is a state that is at least more advantageous than the first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (a state in which a special figure can be changed)]
The first period is a period that is the second gaming state,
The second period is a period that is the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, during the first period, which is the second gaming state, there is a case where it is easy for the player to check the display related to the access information because the gaming operation is not necessary.

  The “second gaming state” may be a big hit gaming state, an electric support state (short time state), or a probability change state. On the other hand, the “first game state” may be a non-hit game state (normal game state), a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), or a non-probability change state.

  Further, the “at least advantageous state over the first gaming state” may indicate a state that is at least advantageous over only the first gaming state, or more than the first gaming state. It may be advantageous and may indicate a state that is more disadvantageous than one or more gaming states different from the first gaming state, or a state that is more advantageous than all gaming states including the first gaming state May be shown.

  In addition, the second gaming state may indicate a state (special figure high-accuracy state) in which the special figure jackpot probability is higher than that of the first gaming state. In this case, the first gaming state may be a special figure low probability state (short time state or normal state).

  The second gaming state may indicate a state with a high probability of hitting a normal figure (a normal high-accuracy state, an electric support state). In this case, the first state may be a normal low probability state (latency probability variation state or normal state).

  In addition, the second gaming state may indicate a state (probability variation state) where the hit probability of both the special figure and the normal figure is high. In this case, even if the first state is a special figure low-accuracy state (short-time state), a normal figure low-accuracy state (latency probability variation state), or a special figure low-accuracy normal figure low-accuracy state (normal state) Good.

  In addition, the second gaming state may indicate a state where there are a lot of balls (a big hit state (a big hit with a ball: for example, a 15R series big hit, a 16R type big hit or an 8R type big hit). The first state is a state in which the number of outgoing balls is small (non-big hit state: for example, probability variation state, short time state), no big hits (sudden probability variation state, latent probability variation state), and out of the second state. It may be a big hit with few spheres (for example, 2R series big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, latent probability variation big hit).

Also,
“The second period [for example, the period during which the attacker is in an open state] is a period that is started at least in the fourth case,
The second period is a period that ends at least in the fifth case,
The fourth case is when the variable pitching means changes at least from the first state to the second state [for example, when the attacker releasing operation is completed]
The fifth case is when the variable pitching means changes at least from the second state to the first state [for example, when the attacker closing operation is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display regarding the access information due to the change in the state of the variable pitching means.

  The “period starting at least in the fourth case” may indicate a period starting only in the fourth case.

  In addition, “a period that ends at least in the fifth case” may indicate a period that ends only in the fifth case.

  In addition, “when the variable pitching means changes at least from the first state to the second state” means when the variable pitching means changes from the first state to the second state. May be shown. Alternatively, when the control means is controlled to change from the first state to the second state, or the control means instructs to change from the first state to the second state (for example, open This may be the case when a signal is transmitted.

  In addition, “when the variable pitching means changes at least from the second state to the first state” means when the variable pitching means changes from the second state to the first state. May be shown. Alternatively, when the control means is controlled to change from the second state to the first state, or the control means instructs to change from the second state to the first state (for example, closing) This may be the case when a signal is transmitted.

Also,
“The access information [for example, URL] is information necessary for a player to access a Web page.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player can access the Web page by acquiring the access information, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  The access information may be a URL or a two-dimensional code. The first type of display is the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 if the access information is a two-dimensional code, but if the access information is a URL, the two-dimensional code Q11 itself may be used. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 may be used. Strictly speaking, the two-dimensional code is a code including a URL or a code representing a URL.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example in which a two-dimensional code is displayed in a big hit of two or more villas in stages.

  In FIG. 65A, as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable big hit” is displayed along with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit. The big hit here is the first big hit (so-called first hit), and “decoration 7” is displayed on the upper right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A character display “first time” is also displayed together with the character display. In addition, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65B is not displayed, but actually a background image of a mountain landscape is displayed. Thereafter, round digestion has progressed, and in FIG. 65 (c), as in FIG. 57 (p), the 15th round jackpot game that is the final round is performed. In FIG. 65 (d), as in FIG. 57 (q), the fifteenth attacker open state maintenance is completed, and the attacker (not shown) is in the closed state maintenance here. Similarly to 57 (r), the character display of 15R in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and in FIG. 65 (f), as the same big hit game end effect as FIG. Is displayed along with the text “probability change rush”.

  In FIG. 65 (g), as in FIG. 57 (t), the control state shifts to the probable change state and the electric support state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “probably changing” in the upper left. The display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the fourth symbol display area 284 has been restored. In addition, the display position of the hold icon display area is switched due to the shift to the electric support state, and the hold icon h11 of four special figures 1 is displayed at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ˜h14 is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 65 (h), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. In addition, the usual symbol variation display is also performed. Thereafter, the symbol variation display is performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 65 (i), the second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (i), the combination of the decorative symbols determined as 16R special big hits “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  After the big hit game start effect is made in FIG. 65 (j), the first round big hit game is started in FIG. 65 (k). In the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (k), a character display of “second time” is displayed together with a character display of “decoration 3”. In addition, a background image of the sea landscape is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Furthermore, a notification image 2072 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 to display the two-dimensional code is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In this example, as soon as the notification image 2072 is displayed, the effect button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (l), the notification image 2072 disappears and the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed. It is displayed. This two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed until the 16th round which is the final round.

  In this example, the two-dimensional code is not displayed for the first time of the big hit, but the two-dimensional code can be displayed when the big hit (at least two consecutive villas) is made with the probability variation pattern during the probability variation. In other words, the two-dimensional code is not displayed when a big hit is made with a non-probable variation during probability variation. In addition, even if it is a big hit with a normal symbol during probability change, a two-dimensional code may be displayed if it is two or more resorts. Also, the two-dimensional code may be displayed even when the normal state is first hit with a non-probable variable symbol and the big hit with a probable variable symbol during the short time started after the big hit game. Alternatively, the two-dimensional code may be displayed even when a normal state is first hit with a non-probability variable symbol and a big hit is made with a non-probability variable symbol during a short time started after the big hit game. Also, a two-dimensional code may be displayed even when a big hit is made with a non-probability variable symbol during probability change and a big hit is made with a probabilistic symbol and / or a non-probability variable symbol during a short time started after the big hit game. Furthermore, it is not limited to more than two consecutive villas, but only when N consecutive villas (for example, five consecutive villas) are displayed, a two-dimensional code may be displayed, or every specific consecutive resort (for example, the number of consecutive resorts is even) In such a case, the two-dimensional code may be displayed. When displaying a two-dimensional code, in any case, the player's operation (for example, pressing of the operation means) may be displayed as a trigger, or the start of a round (not limited to one round) You may make it display on the occasion of 2 rounds or more. In addition, the two-dimensional code may be displayed in the interval between rounds, or the first period of the jackpot game period (for example, the period of the interval between rounds, the period after n rounds, or the round end n seconds) Or the like may be temporarily erased during the period of (1).

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65 in stages.

  In FIG. 66 (n) following FIG. 65 (m), the 16th attacker open state is maintained and the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed. In FIG. 66 (o), the attacker open state is maintained. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 disappears, and in FIG. 66 (p), the same big hit game end effect as in FIG. 66 (f) is performed. As described above, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 displayed in the big hit game of the second series is continuously displayed during the big hit game. That is, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds or during the period in which the attacker is released, and disappears when the big hit game end effect is started.

  In FIG. 66 (q), the control state again shifts to the probable change state and the electric support state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character display “probably changing” in the upper left again.

  In this example, the display / non-display of the two-dimensional code is determined by the number of consecutive games, but the display / non-display of the two-dimensional code may be determined by a jackpot symbol. For example, a two-dimensional code can be displayed for a jackpot symbol with probability variation, and a two-dimensional code may not be displayed for a jackpot symbol with probability variation. Further, the two-dimensional code may be displayed only for the big hits of the 15R system, the 16R system, and the 8R system without displaying the big hits of hidden probability change or sudden probability change. In addition, it is possible to display a two-dimensional code in a big hit with a ball and not display a two-dimensional code in a big hit without a ball. Here, the big hit with the ball is the big hit during the period when the attackers are free to enter the game ball (the open period of the packer) during each round. The attacker's release period in is a big hit of the period during which it is difficult for the game ball to enter (paca release period). In this case as well, when displaying a two-dimensional code, in any case, the player's operation (for example, operation of the operating means) may be displayed as a trigger, or the round start (1 You may make it display on the occasion not only a round but 2 rounds or more. In addition, the two-dimensional code may be displayed in the interval between rounds, or the first period of the jackpot game period (for example, the period of the interval between rounds, the period after n rounds, or the round end n seconds) Or the like may be temporarily erased during the period of (1).

As described above, in the description using FIGS.
“Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
Variable entry means [eg, attacker 234];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
The first type of the plurality of types of display is a display [for example, two-dimensional code acquisition promoting image 2073 or two-dimensional code Q11] including at least access information [for example, URL],
The variable pitching means, when in the big hit gaming state, at least from one state of the first state [for example, closed state] and the second state [for example, open state] to the other state Is a changeable means,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means displays one of the first-type displays in the first period (hereinafter referred to as “first display” [for example, two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 or two-dimensional code Q11]). Is a means capable of displaying at least,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period,
The first period is a period [for example, a period of an interval between rounds] in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state.
The second period is a period during which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state [for example, a period during which the attacker opens state is maintained]
The first period is a period that is at least included in a period of a first jackpot [for example, a jackpot of a second consecutive villa] in the jackpot gaming state,
The second period is a period at least included in the first jackpot period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics. In addition, during the first period during the first jackpot period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to check the display related to the access information because the game operation (for example, ball launching) is not necessary. There is a case.

  The above-mentioned note can be applied to this game table as well, which will be described later. The above-mentioned writing can also be applied to “”.

  The “period included at least in the first jackpot period” may be a period included only in the first jackpot period, the first jackpot, and the first jackpot. It may be one or a plurality of big hits and small hits different from one big hit, or a period included in the first big hit and one or a plurality of big hits or small hits different from the first big hit.

  The jackpot gaming state may be a gaming state including two or more jackpots.

  As for the above-mentioned remarks, a game table characterized by “~” described later. The same applies to the above.

Also,
“The first period [for example, the period of the interval between rounds] is a period that is started at least after the second period [for example, the period during which the attacker opens state is maintained].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, during the first period, there is a case where it is easy for the player to check the display related to the access information because the game operation is not necessary. Even if the player cannot confirm the display regarding the access information during the second period, the player may be able to confirm the first period after the end of the second period. Furthermore, it may be possible to prevent the display related to the access information from being missed.

Also,
“The second period [for example, the period during which the attacker is in an open state] is a period that is at least started in the first case,
The second period is a period that ends at least in the second case;
The first case is a case where the variable pitching means changes at least from the first state to the second state [for example, when the attacker releasing operation is completed]
The second case is when the variable pitching means changes at least from the second state to the first state [for example, when the attacker closing operation is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display regarding the access information due to the change in the state of the variable pitching means.

  Here, the “first case” corresponds to the above “fourth case”, and the “second case” corresponds to the above “fifth case”. Therefore, “a period that is at least started in the first case” may indicate a period that is started only in the first case, and “a period that is at least ended in the second case”. "May indicate a period that is ended only in the second case.

Also,
"The display means is means for not displaying at least the first display in the third case,
The third case is a case where the second big hit [for example, the first big hit (so-called first hit)] in the big hit gaming state is in progress.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to give variations to the display during the big hit and to keep the player from getting bored by providing the big hit that displays the display related to the access information and the big hit that is not displayed.

  Note that “the display means does not display at least the first display in the third case” means that the display means in the third case includes the first display. The display may not be displayed, only the first display of the first type of display may not be displayed, or may be different from the first type of display or One or a plurality of types of display may be displayed, or a combination thereof.

  In addition, as an example of the combination of the first jackpot and the second jackpot, a combination of the first jackpot (so-called first hit) and a jackpot of two or more villas may be used. A combination of big hits may be used, or a combination of big hits with exit balls (for example, 16R series big hits, 15R series big hits, 8R series big hits) and real big hits without outgoing balls (latency probability variation big hits, sudden probability variation big hits, 2R series big hits) It may be a combination of a big hit (15R big hit, 16R big hit) and a relatively short big hit (8R big hit, 2R big hit). Here, in the above specific example, the former is not limited to the first jackpot, and the latter is not limited to the second jackpot. The former may be the second jackpot, and the latter may be the first jackpot.

  Further, there may be a plurality of types of big hits as shown in the third big hit, the fourth big hit, and so on.

Also,
“The access information [for example, URL] is information necessary for a player to access a Web page.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player can access the Web page by acquiring the access information, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example in which display and non-display of a two-dimensional code are switched by a player's operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67, as shown in FIG. 67A, the effect button 136 is pressed during the sixth round in which the notification image 2072 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The image 2072 disappears, and a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed in the central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the presentation button 136 is pressed again while maintaining the opened state of the attacker in the sixth round in which the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed, and this time, as shown in FIG. The promotion image 2073 disappears and the notification image 2072 is displayed again. Note that the notification image 2072 displayed for the second time or later may be changed in display mode or display content (for example, in a colored display mode or “Please press a button”).

  As shown in FIG. 67 (e), when the state of maintaining the attacker open state of the sixth round is completed and the round number display in the upper left corner disappears, the notification image 2072 also disappears, and the round corresponding to between the sixth and seventh rounds It becomes the period of the interval.

  Even if the notification image 2072 is a period of the interval between rounds where the notification image 2072 is not displayed, when the effect button 136 is pressed, a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed as shown in FIG. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 displayed here continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 67 (g) and the effect button 136 is not pressed even if the attacker is in the open state and the seventh round is started. As long as the big hit game end effect is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67, when display of the notification image 2072 is started during the big hit game, either the notification image 2072 or the two-dimensional code Q11 is always displayed until the big hit game end effect is started. .

  In this example, even if it is the interval period between rounds, the display and non-display of the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 are switched by pressing the effect button 136. Switching may not be possible.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of an error display stepwise.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the effect button 136 is pressed during the sixth round in which the notification image 2072 is displayed, and the notification image 2072 disappears as shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed at the center of the display device 208.

  Here, the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. When the lower pan full error occurs, a display for prompting the error to be solved is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (c), a character display “Pull out the sphere” is displayed. Hereinafter, this character display is referred to as an error display. The error display includes not only a display for urging the error, but also a display for simply notifying that an error has occurred (for example, the door is open). You may include notifications (for example, the door is closed). The error display corresponds to an example of a second type of display. In FIG. 68 (c), the error display overlaps the two-dimensional code Q11, but only slightly overlaps the upper end portion of the two-dimensional code Q11, and the two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 68 (c). The code Q11 can be read.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68, when the effect button 136 is pressed while the two-dimensional code Q11h (two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073) is displayed, the two-dimensional code Q11h (two-dimensional code Q11h) The code acquisition promotion image 2073) disappears.

  In FIG. 68D, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 disappears due to the press of the effect button 136, but the error display continues to be displayed until the error is resolved. Further, a notification image 2072 is displayed instead of the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68 as well, even in the interval period between rounds, when the effect button 136 is pressed, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed.

  In FIG. 68F, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed again when the effect button 136 is pressed during the interval between rounds. Although the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 displayed here is displayed after the error display, a part of the error display slightly overlaps the upper end portion of the two-dimensional code Q11. The two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. 68 (f) can also be read.

  The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 68 (g) even if the attacker keeps the open state and the seventh round is started, and the big hit game ends unless the effect button 136 is pressed. It is displayed continuously until the production starts. On the other hand, at the timing of FIG. 68 (h), the ball is removed from the lower plate 128, and the error display is completed.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing step by step how the demo screen is displayed in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  FIG. 69 (a) shows a state in which neither Special Figure 1 nor Special Figure 2 is reserved, and neither the special symbol variation display nor the normal symbol variation display is performed. The background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (a) (the image where Tonosama and the old man are sitting) becomes the default background image.

  When the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without the symbol variation display being started after the special symbol or ordinary symbol variation display is stopped, the demonstration mode is entered, and the decoration symbol display device 208 has a demonstration. A screen is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (b), a notification image 2076 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 to display the menu screen is displayed. If the notification image 2076 is not displayed, the menu screen is not displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed. Even if the notification image 2076 is not displayed, the menu screen is displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed. You may make it do. This notification image may be continuously displayed unless the symbol variation display is started or the effect button 136 is pressed, or is displayed only for a predetermined length of time. It may be a thing.

  When the second time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without the symbol variation display being started after the special symbol or ordinary symbol variation display is stopped, the default background is displayed as shown in FIG. The image disappears and only the notification image 2076 remains.

  If the third time (for example, 75 seconds) elapses without the symbol variation display being started after the special symbol or ordinary symbol variation display is stopped, the background image is displayed as shown in FIG. This is an image displaying the logo of the manufacturer of this pachinko machine. Note that the notification image 2076 remains displayed.

  If the fourth time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses without the symbol variation display being started after the special symbol or ordinary symbol variation display is stopped, the background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (e). This is the title display image of this pachinko machine. Note that the notification image 2076 remains displayed.

  When the fifth time (for example, 105 seconds) elapses without the symbol variation display being started after the special symbol or ordinary symbol variation display is stopped, as shown in FIG. Return to the same state as shown in b). Thereafter, the process from FIG. 69B to FIG. 69G is repeated until the symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there are a plurality of periods in which a two-dimensional code can be displayed step by step.

  FIG. 70 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 69 (a), and FIG. 70 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 69 (b). That is, when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the special symbol or ordinary symbol variation display is stopped and the symbol variation display is not started, the effect symbol 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A notification image 2076 that prompts the user to press to display the menu screen is displayed.

  Here, when an effect button 136 (not shown) is pressed, an option menu shown in FIG. 21A is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 70C. Enter mode.

  When the player operates the operation key unit 190 described in detail with reference to FIG. 16 to select and determine “user menu”, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. When the player operates the operation key unit 190 and selects “member registration”, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the configuration shown in FIG. 24 (a). The screen for member registration is displayed. In the selection window 2081 on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (d), the cursor C is set to the “member registration” button and “member registration” is selected. Further, the message window 2082 on the right side is displayed with characters for recommending member registration.

  When the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 of the operation key unit 190 is pressed in the state where “member registration” is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays FIG. 24 as shown in FIG. The member registration display screen shown in (b) is displayed. On this member registration screen, a two-dimensional code Q1 for member registration is displayed and guided to the password input screen. The player reads the member registration two-dimensional code Q1 with the mobile phone terminal M or smartphone having the camera function and the barcode reader function as shown in FIG. 16, accesses the server S shown in FIG. To get. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (e), the cursor C is set to the “to password input” button, and the transition to the password input screen is selected.

  When the OK button 192 or the production button 136 of the operation key unit 190 is pressed in a state where “to password input” is selected, a password is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. The input screen is displayed.

  The player inputs the acquired password by operating the operation key unit 190. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (g), the password “G @ 4AT” is input, and the cursor C is set to the “OK” button. In this state, when the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 of the operation key unit 190 is pressed, the authentication operation of the input password is performed by the pachinko machine 100.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (h), it is notified that password authentication has been successful and that the game can be started in the state set to the original mode. The player can exit the user mode and start the game by pressing the OK button 192 or the effect button 136 of the operation key unit 190.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (i), the display screen returns to the default background image. At the lower right of this display screen, a level display 2077 of the current player in the original mode is displayed. Here, the player who has just registered as a member is given 50 levels as the first bonus bonus, and the game is started toward the 51st level clear.

  FIG. 70 (j) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 after a while has elapsed since the game was started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, special symbol variation display is performed, and the level display 2077 is increased to a little over half.

  Further, the game is continued, and after the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 52 (n) to 53 (s), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (k) has “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“ The combination of the decoration pattern of the 15R special jackpot of “Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 6L, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a big hit game start effect. Here, a mission completion notification 2078 is also displayed at the lower left of the display screen. The mission achievement notification 2078 notifies the accomplished mission, and here, it is notified that two missions have been achieved.

  In FIG. 70 (m), the first round of the big hit game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit game effect in which the character C1 appears is executed. In addition, a notification image 2072 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 to display the two-dimensional code is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  71 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 70 in stages.

  In FIG. 71 (n) continuing from FIG. 70 (m), the sixth round of big hit game is performed. In this example, the effect button 136 is pressed in the middle of the sixth round, and the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 71 (o). The two-dimensional code Q11 included in the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is for a privilege including, for example, a URL of a Web page that informs that a big hit of 15 rounds is won.

  Thereafter, round digestion continues, and in FIG. 71 (p), the 15th round of big hit game is performed, and the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image is maintained until the 15th attacker's open state maintenance is completed in FIG. 71 (q). 2073 is continuously displayed. That is, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds or during the period in which the attacker is released, and disappears when the big hit game end effect is started.

  In FIG. 70 (r), as the same big hit game end effect as in FIG. 57 (s), the character display of “probability change entry” is displayed together with the display of the main character's character.

  In FIG. 70 (s), the control state shifts to the probable change state and the electric support state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character display “probably changing” in the upper left, and the variable icon display area 280 and the fourth symbol display. The display of area 284 has been restored. In addition, the display position of the hold icon display area is switched due to the shift to the power support state, and the hold icon h11 of four special figures 1 is displayed at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (s). ˜h14 is displayed. Furthermore, although the level display 2077 has been restored, it is displayed here at the level before the above two missions achieved before starting the big hit game.

  In FIG. 70 (t), the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 and the normal symbol fluctuation display are started. When the symbol variation display is started, the level display 2077 is raised to level 52 reflecting the achievement of the above two missions. It should be noted that the level display 2077 may reflect the mission achieved before the big hit game is started when the big hit game end effect is completed (timing in FIG. 70 (s)). Alternatively, at the timing of FIG. 70 (s), the level display 2077 reflecting the achievement of the mission may be restored at the same time as the symbol variation display is started, without restoring the level display 2077.

  In this example, the two-dimensional code is displayed twice in FIG. 70 (e) in the user mode and FIGS. 71 (o) to (p) in the big hit game. The two-dimensional codes to be displayed are for member registration and jackpot information benefits, and are different from each other.

  The period during which 2D code can be displayed is during jackpot game, during symbol variation display, during symbol suspension, during demonstration screen display, during probability variation (special diagram high probability state), and non-probability variation state (special diagram low probability state) ), Power support state (general figure high probability state), non-electric support state (general figure low probability state), and user mode periods may be used. The period for displaying is a plurality of periods. Furthermore, a plurality of periods (for example, 1 to 3R and 15R, or 1 to 5R and 6R to 15R) may be provided in the same jackpot game, and the period in which the two-dimensional code is displayed may be a plurality of periods. The two-dimensional codes displayed in a plurality of periods may be different two-dimensional codes or the same two-dimensional code.

  Further, when the state is in the probability changing state or the electric support state, or in the probability changing state and the electric support state, the transition to the user mode may or may not be restricted. That is, the display of the option menu shown in FIG. 70C may or may not be restricted.

  In addition, the display mode of a display including a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image) is changed to a display mode of a pre-reading notice (for example, “Hot Ze. ”May be displayed). Here, the two-dimensional code may include a URL of a Web page that informs the reservation of the pre-reading notice target (the number of symbol changes to be displayed ahead) and the truth of the pre-reading notice.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a two-dimensional code is displayed at the time when the power support state (normal high probability state) ends.

  The state shown in FIG. 72 (h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 58 (h), in which the symbol variation display of the 100th special figure after the end of the big hit game is stopped.

  The state shown in FIG. 72 (i) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 58 (i), and is a state in which a character display for notifying that the electric saho state (time reduction state) has ended is made. In this example, the two-dimensional code Q12 is displayed at this timing. The two-dimensional code Q12 here includes, for example, a URL of a web page that informs that the mission achieved by the completion of the electric support state has been completed, or the number of balls in the electric support state has a constant value. It includes the URL of the Web page that informs that the mission achieved by exceeding has been cleared.

  The state shown in FIG. 72 (j) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 58 (j), and the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7” is performed. It is in a state.

  The two-dimensional code Q12 may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display of the 101st special figure after the end of the big hit game.

As described above, in the description using FIGS.
“Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
Variable entry means [eg, attacker 234];
Control means [e.g., main controller 300];
A game machine equipped with
The control means is means capable of executing at least control of a plurality of control states,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
The first type of the plurality of types of display is a display [for example, two-dimensional code acquisition promoting image 2073 or two-dimensional code Q11] including at least access information [for example, URL],
The variable entry means is a means capable of changing at least from one state of the first state [eg, closed state] and the second state [eg, open state] to the other state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least one display of the first type of display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) in a first period,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period,
The first period is a period [for example, a period of an interval between rounds] in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state.
The second period is a period during which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state [for example, a period during which the attacker opens state is maintained]
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display when the first control state among the plurality of control states [for example, a user mode state].
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display when the second control state among the plurality of control states [for example, a big hit gaming state],
The first period is a period in any one of the first control state and the second control state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics. In addition, there may be a case where the display regarding the access information can be varied by displaying the display regarding the access information in a plurality of control states.

  The above-mentioned note can be applied to this game table as well, which will be described later. The above-mentioned writing can also be applied to “”.

  The “second control state” may be, for example, a normal state, a big hit gaming state, a demo screen, a symbol changing state, an electric support state, a non-electric support state, or the like. Further, the “first control state” may be a control state different from the second control state.

  Further, “at least the first display can be displayed” means that only the first display may be displayed, the first type of display including the first display, and the first display. One or a plurality of displays different from one type of display may be displayed.

  Furthermore, there may be three or more control states as the plurality of control states. There are three or more control states such as when the symbol is stopped (including when the customer waiting screen (demo screen) is displayed), when the symbol is changing, and the big hit gaming state. Also good.

  As for the above-mentioned remarks, a game table characterized by “~” described later. The same applies to the above.

Also,
“The first period [for example, the period of the interval between rounds] is a period that is started at least after the second period [for example, the period during which the attacker opens state is maintained].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, during the first period, there is a case where it is easy for the player to check the display related to the access information because the game operation is not necessary. Even if the player cannot confirm the display regarding the access information during the second period, the player may be able to confirm the first period after the end of the second period. Furthermore, it may be possible to prevent the display related to the access information from being missed.

Also,
“The second period [for example, the period during which the attacker is in an open state] is a period that is at least started in the first case,
The second period is a period that ends at least in the second case;
The first case is a case where the variable pitching means changes at least from the first state to the second state [for example, when the attacker releasing operation is completed]
The second case is when the variable pitching means changes at least from the second state to the first state [for example, when the attacker closing operation is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display regarding the access information due to the change in the state of the variable pitching means.

  Here, the “first case” corresponds to the above “fourth case”, and the “second case” corresponds to the above “fifth case”.

Also,
“The second period is a period in at least the same control state as the first period [for example, jackpot gaming state],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there are cases where the display related to the access information can be varied by displaying the display related to the access information in a plurality of control states.

  Note that “at least the same control state as the first period” may be the same control state as that of the first period only.

Also,
“The access information [for example, URL] is information necessary for a player to access a Web page.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player can access the Web page by acquiring the access information, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  So far, the example in which the two-dimensional code is overlapped with another display has been described. However, another display may overlap the two-dimensional code.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect display overlaps the two-dimensional code step by step.

  In this example, the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 may be displayed at the start of the first round in the jackpot game, or the effect button according to the notification image 2072 displayed when the sixth round is started It may be a case where 136 is pressed and the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed. The displayed two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds or during the period in which the attacker is released, and continues to be displayed until the big hit game end effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63A, a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed so as to overlap the display of the sixth round jackpot game effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (b), an animation display in which a group of soldiers marches from the right end of the screen toward the left side is started. This animation display corresponds to an effect display of a pre-reading notice indicating that there is a big hit in the hold. In the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), the secondary code Q11 can be read.

  In FIG. 73 (c), the march of the soldiers proceeds, and the head of the army slightly approaches the secondary code Q11 of the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073, and overlaps with a small portion on the right end of the secondary code Q11. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 73C, the secondary code Q11 can be read.

  In FIG. 73 (d), the marching of the soldier group further proceeds, and the group is passing in front of the secondary code Q11 and overlaps most of the secondary code Q11. In the state shown in FIG. 73 (d), it is impossible to read the secondary code Q11.

  In FIG. 73 (e), most of the group of soldiers has passed in front of the secondary code Q11, and only the tail end overlaps a small portion of the left end of the secondary code Q11. In the state shown in FIG. 73 (e), the secondary code Q11 can be read.

  In FIG. 73 (f), most of the soldier group disappears from the display screen, and only the tail is slightly visible at the left end of the display screen. In FIG. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 73 (f), the secondary code Q11 can be read.

  In the example shown in FIG. 73 described above, even when the same animation is displayed, the overlapping area is changed with time, so that a case where the two-dimensional code can be read and a case where the two-dimensional code cannot be read are generated.

  It should be noted that the army (character image) overlaps the secondary code Q11 of the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 so that the secondary code Q11 can be read, and the secondary code Q11 cannot be read. The state and secondary code Q11 may be read a plurality of times (for example, twice) for transition in the order of possible states.

  In that case, in the first time and the second time, the length of a period in which the army (character image) can read the secondary code Q11 while overlapping with the secondary code Q11 of the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073. May be different. For example, this period may be longer in the first round (for example, the first round) than in the second round. For example, the last time (for example, the third time) may be longer than the last time (for example, the second time) before the last time. For example, the last time may be longer than the first time. For example, this period may be longer in the first round than in the last round.

  In the first time and the second time, the length of the period in which the army (character image) cannot read the secondary code Q11 while overlapping with the secondary code Q11 of the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is set. It may be different.

  In this example, the two-dimensional code Q11 is overlapped by display in the pre-reading preview notice animation, but animation such as a notice display, an error display (for example, ball removal, etc.), a hitting suggestion display (right-handed notification, etc.), etc. A part or all of the two-dimensional code may be overlapped by the display.

  FIG. 74 is an example showing step by step an example in which a two-dimensional code appears as an animation.

  In FIG. 74 (a), the first round of the jackpot game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot game effect in which the character C1 appears is executed. In addition, a notification image 2072 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 to display the two-dimensional code is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, the effect button 136 is pressed as soon as the notification image 2072 is displayed. When the effect button 136 is pressed, the notification image 2072 disappears as shown in FIG. 74 (b). Eventually, an animation display in which the two-dimensional code Q11 gradually appears from the right end of the screen is started. In FIG. 74 (c), the animation display is started. In FIGS. 74 (d) to (g), the main character rolls the disk 2079 on which the two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed. The situation is shown. The two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. 6D is still visible only about half and cannot be read, but the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. That is, the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in (e) or (f) of the figure can be read although the direction is oblique because the disk 2079 is rotating. This animation display is performed over a plurality of rounds (here, from 1 round to 2 rounds), and is continued even during the period of the interval between rounds ((e) and (f) in the figure, or (f) only in the figure)). The

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (h), the disc 2079 is located in the center in the left-right direction, and the main character is posing. In the same figure (i)-the same figure (h), Tono-san puts the disk 2079 and leaves in the right direction. The disc 2079 located at the center in the left-right direction continues to be displayed thereafter (see (i) and (j) in the same figure), but when the effect button 136 is pressed, it is shown in FIG. 74 (k). As shown in FIG. 74 (l), the notification image 2072 is displayed instead of the two-dimensional code Q11.

  When the disk 2079 is displayed once and disappears when the effect button 136 is pressed, and the effect button 136 is pressed again, the same animation as the animation from FIG. 74 (c) to FIG. 74 (h) is displayed again. It may be displayed, the display may be started in the middle of the animation, the animation may be displayed in fast-forward, or the disk 2079 appears in the center in the left-right direction without displaying the animation. It may be allowed (see FIG. 74 (i)).

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 75 (d) ′ is a diagram showing a state corresponding to FIG. 74 (d). Thereafter, one round is completed, and an interval period between rounds is reached. FIG. 75 (e) ′ is a diagram showing a state corresponding to FIG. 74 (e), and FIG. 75 (f) ′ is a diagram showing a state corresponding to FIG. 74 (f). In the period of the interval between rounds (FIG. 75 (e) ′ and FIG. (F) ′, or FIG. 75 (f) ′ only), an animation dedicated to the interval between rounds is displayed. In this variation, a girl animation is displayed. Even during the period where the effect display for the interval between rounds is performed, in the lower layer, the animation where Tono-sama rolls the disk 2079 is continued, and when the next round (here 2 rounds) is started, The continuation of the animation is displayed (see FIG. 75 (g) ′).

  When the next round is started, the animation in which Tono-sama rolls the disk 2079 may be resumed from the scene immediately before the effect display dedicated to the interval between rounds is started. Further, when the second round is started, the animation in which Tono-sama rolls the disk 2079 is canceled, and the disk 2079 may appear in the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 74 (i)).

  Further, even when an animation for displaying a two-dimensional code is not executed, an effect display dedicated to the interval between rounds may be performed.

  Furthermore, the display of the two-dimensional code may have a higher priority than the effect display of the interval between rounds. That is, when both the effect display and the display of the two-dimensional code are performed during the interval between rounds, the display of the two-dimensional code is preferentially displayed.

  The two-dimensional code display animation is not limited to the above, and may be an animation in which the two-dimensional code is gradually displayed (fade in) or an animation in which the two-dimensional code is gradually deleted (fade out).

  Next, a modified example of the big hit game will be described.

  The big hit game of this modified example is that the opening of the first attacker in the first round is an open for a period in which it is difficult to win a prize (opening the paca), and a big hit without a real departure (latent probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, 2R type big hit) It is a big hit game with a jump-up bonus (JUB) that first makes an illusion with a small win and then releases the easy period (packer release).

  FIG. 76 is a time chart of the first round of JUB jackpot game.

  In FIG. 76, a special electric accessory release signal, a special electric accessory operating signal, an attacker, and an attacker solenoid signal are shown in order from the top. An arrow a and an arrow b are also shown. These signals and arrows are the same as the signals and arrows described in FIG.

  In the first round of JUB jackpot game, the attacker opens 3 times in total. As can be seen from the time chart of the attacker and the time chart of the attacker solenoid signal shown in FIG. 76, the first two times are the opening of a period in which winning is difficult (short period), which is the opening operation of the pack. The last opening is an opening in a period (long term) in which a winning is easy, and the opening operation of the packer. The player is discouraged when he sees the opening action of the attacker's paka-paka, but when he sees the opening action of the packer, he knows that the game is a big hit game with a ball, and the fun of the game is improved.

  From the second round of the JUB jackpot game, the attacker will be able to release the packer and expect to go out.

  Even in such a first round of JUB jackpot game, a two-dimensional code is displayed and the present invention can be applied. Also, for the second and subsequent rounds, the attacker may be released multiple times during one round.

  If an attacker opens multiple times during a round, a two-dimensional code may be displayed continuously between the Paca release operation and the Paca release operation, or a two-dimensional code is displayed during Paca release. However, the two-dimensional code may not be displayed during the Paca opening operation. Alternatively, the two-dimensional code may not be displayed during the opening operation of the packer, and the two-dimensional code may be displayed during the opening operation of the packer. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code displayed during the opening operation of the packer may be different from the two-dimensional code displayed during the opening operation of the packer.

  Note that the same may be applied to a big hit (RUB) composed of a round with a short opening time (for example, a round of the opening operation of the packer) and a long round (a round of the opening operation of the packer).

  Next, the opening of the electric chew according to the usual figure will be described in detail.

  FIG. 77 is a time chart showing the operation of the electric Chu.

  In FIG. 77, in order from the top, a normal symbol changing signal, a common symbol per signal, a normal electric accessory release signal, a normal electric accessory operating signal, an electric Chu, and a normal electric accessory solenoid signal are shown. .

  The normal symbol changing signal, the normal symbol per signal, the normal electric accessory release signal, and the normal electric accessory operating signal are signals as seen from the game rules. If the normal symbol changing signal is ON, the normal symbol is ON. If the display device is in operation and is off, it is inactive (stopped). If the signal per normal symbol is on, the electric chew is operating, and if it is off, the electric chew is not operating (stopped). The normal electric accessory release signal is a signal for maintaining the open state of the electric chew. In addition, if the normal electric accessory operating signal is on, the electric chew is in the open operation, maintaining the open state, or in the closing operation, and if it is off, the electric chew is in the closed state. In the operation per electric chew here, since the opening operation starts at the timing when the closing operation is completed, the electric chew is always on during the hitting operation.

  77. “Open” of the electric chew shown in FIG. 77 corresponds to the opening operation or maintaining the open state, and “closed” of the electric chew corresponds to the closing operation or maintaining the closed state. 77 is a signal for maintaining the open state, which is transmitted to the solenoid that opens and closes the electric chew.

  The timing for starting the hit of the normal map may be the timing when the signal during the normal map change is turned off, the timing when the signal for the normal map is turned on, or the normal electric utility release signal is It may be the timing when it is first turned on, or it may be the timing when the normal electric accessory operating signal is first turned on, or the timing when the electric Chu starts the first opening. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the normal electric accessory solenoid signal is first turned on.

  On the other hand, the hitting end timing of the normal map may be the timing when the signal during normal map change is turned on, the timing when the signal per normal signal is turned off, In the case where the signal for operating the normal electric component is on, the timing when the signal for operating the normal electric component is finally turned off may be the last time, or the signal indicating that the normal electric component is operating is the last. It may be the timing when it is turned off, or at the timing when the electric chow is finally changed from “open” to “closed” when the signal per normal signal and / or the signal during operation of the ordinary electric utility is on. It may be the timing when the ordinary electric utility solenoid signal is finally turned off from the on state when the signal per normal signal and / or the normal electric agent operating signal is on. From Hiroshizu per signal and / or common electric combination thereof during operation signal is turned off, it may be a timing at which the fluctuation wait time has elapsed.

  Up to this point, the case where a two-dimensional code is displayed during a special jackpot game has been described. However, during a normal game (a signal on period per normal symbol shown in FIG. 77), Other displays such as warning display, notification display, instruction display, suggestion display, error display, and effect display may be displayed. The two-dimensional code in this case may include, for example, a URL of a web page that informs that a mission achieved by winning n times (first number of times) per common figure is cleared. Therefore, the electric chew corresponds to an example of variable pitching means, and the gaming state per universal figure corresponds to an example of the second gaming state or the second control state. The period between the opening of the electronic choke corresponds to an example of the first period, and the period during which the electric chew is kept open corresponds to an example of the second period.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the two-dimensional code.

  In FIG. 78A, a character image (a character image of a lanyard imitating a cactus) is embedded so as to overlap a part of a black and white two-dimensional code. Note that the color of the character image is white, but it may be any color.

  In FIG. 78 (b), the character display ("heat") is embedded so as to overlap in a part of the black and white two-dimensional code. The character display color is gray, but any color may be used.

  The two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 78 (a) or the two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 78 (b) can be read.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which another display overlaps the two-dimensional code.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79A, a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed so as to overlap the display of the big hit game effect in the sixth round. Further, the error display of black characters “please remove the sphere” overlaps (overlaps) the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073. This error display is a non-transparent display, and when viewed in detail, of the two-dimensional code Q11 in the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073, the clipping described in detail with reference to FIG. The symbol Q_2, the alignment pattern Q_3, the timing pattern Q_4, and the data cell Q_6 partially overlap each other. On the other hand, there is no overlap with the format information Q_5. The two-dimensional code Q11 illustrated in FIG. 79A can be read by an external device such as a smartphone having an image reading function. The two-dimensional code Q11 corresponds to an example of a first type of display.

  If the two-dimensional codes are different, it may be impossible to read even at the same display position.

  Also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (b), the error display of gray characters “Please remove the sphere” overlaps the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073. The error display shown in FIG. 79 (b) is a display with a transmittance of 50%, and in detail, as in the example of FIG. 79 (a), the cut-out symbol Q_2 in the two-dimensional code Q11, The alignment pattern Q_3, the timing pattern Q_4, and the data cell Q_6 partially overlap each other. In addition, the error display shown in FIG. 79B also overlaps with a part of the format information Q_5 in the two-dimensional code Q11, but the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. It can be read by an external device having an image reading function.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79C, the error display of the image 2061 in which the character display “please remove the sphere” is overlapped with the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 overlaps. The error display of the image 2061 is a display with a transmittance of 50%, and when viewed in detail, the cutout symbol Q_2, the alignment pattern Q_3, the timing pattern Q_4, and the format information Q_5 of the two-dimensional code Q11. And a part of each of the data cells Q_6. Even when such an image 2061 overlaps, the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. 79 (c) can be read by an external device having an image reading function.

  It should be noted that the image may overlap one or more of the cutout symbol Q_2, the alignment pattern Q_3, the timing pattern Q_4, the format information Q_5, and the data cell Q_6, and the image overlaps all of them. The image may overlap with only one or a plurality of them.

  FIG. 80A is a diagram illustrating an example in which the error display overlaps the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 but does not overlap the two-dimensional code Q11 itself.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80A, a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed so as to overlap the display of the sixth round jackpot game effect. Furthermore, a black character error display “door open error” overlaps the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073. This error display is an opaque display, and overlaps with a character display (“2D code GET)” that recommends acquiring the 2D code Q11 in the 2D code acquisition promoting image 2073. However, it does not overlap the two-dimensional code Q11 itself. As a result, although it is difficult to visually recognize the character display that recommends obtaining the two-dimensional code Q11, the two-dimensional code Q11 can be read by an external device having an image reading function. Note that the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. 80 (a) includes a URL of a Web page that informs that a 15-round jackpot has been won.

  FIG. 80B is a diagram illustrating an example in which the error display overlaps the two-dimensional code Q11 itself.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80B, the same two-dimensional code Q1 displayed on the member registration screen in the user mode as the member registration screen shown in FIG. The same error display as the black error display “door open error” shown in Fig. 8 overlaps. Thus, the black error display “door open error” does not overlap the two-dimensional code itself in the state shown in FIG. 80A (big hit gaming state), but the state shown in FIG. 80B. In (user mode state), the two-dimensional code itself overlaps.

  The two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. 80 (b) is different in type from the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. 80 (a) and includes the URL of the initial registration page for member registration. Thus, depending on the type of the two-dimensional code, another display (for example, error display) may or may not overlap the two-dimensional code. Note that the two-dimensional code Q1 shown in FIG. 80B can also be read, but may not be read.

In the above explanation,
“A game machine having display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208],
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display [for example, two-dimensional code Q11 or two-dimensional code acquisition promoting image 2073],
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display [eg, error display],
The first type of display is a display including at least access information [for example, URL],
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the first case,
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the second case,
The first case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means [for example, the case shown in FIG. 68 (c)]
The second case is a case where at least the second type of display is not displayed on the display means [for example, a case shown in FIG. 68 (b)],
The second type display is a display in which at least a part overlaps at least a part of the first type display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 68 (c)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics. Further, the access information displayed on the display means may be allowed to be confirmed by the player regardless of the presence or absence of the second type of display. In addition, the second type of display overlaps the first type of display, so that the player's line of sight pays attention to the first type of display, so that the display related to the access information is displayed. It may be possible to prevent the person from overlooking.

  The above-mentioned note can be applied to this game table as well, which will be described later. The above-mentioned writing can also be applied to “”.

  The display unit may be a unit capable of displaying only the plurality of types of display, may be a unit capable of displaying a display different from the plurality of types of display, It may be a means that can be operated.

  The first type of display may be a display including only access information, or may be a display including character information and symbol information.

  The first case may be a case where only the second type display is displayed on the display means, or a third type different from the second type display. The display [warning display, notification display, instruction display, suggestion display, error display, performance display, etc.] may be displayed together with the second type of display.

  The second case may be a case where only the second type of display is not displayed on the display means, or a third type of display different from the second type of display. The display [warning display, notification display, instruction display, suggestion display, error display, performance display, etc.] may not be displayed together with the second type of display.

  The second type of display may be an effect display, a warning display, a notification display, an instruction display, a suggestion display, etc. in addition to an error display.

  The display of the second type may be a display that may entirely overlap the display of the first type, or all may be part of the display of the first type. It may be a display that may overlap, or a part may be a display that may overlap all of the first type display, or a part may be the first It may be a display that may overlap a part of the type of display.

  As for the above-mentioned remarks, a game table characterized by “~” described later. The same applies to the above.

Also,
“In the third case, the display means may start displaying the second type of display,
In the fourth case, the display means is a means that may start displaying the first type of display,
The third case is a case where at least the first type of display is displayed on the display means [for example, a case shown in FIG. 68 (b)]
The fourth case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means [for example, the case shown in FIG. 68 (e)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the display relating to the access information is displayed.

  That is, the display order may be the first type display → the second type display, the second type display → the first type display.

  The third case may be a case where only the first type of display is displayed on the display means, and the third type of display is the first type. It may be a case where it is displayed together with the display.

  Further, the fourth case may be a case where only the second type of display is displayed on the display means, and the third type of display is the second type. It may be a case where it is displayed together with the display.

Also,
“The second type of display is an error display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the display related to the access information is displayed by displaying the error by displaying the error on the display means.

Also,
“Variable ball entry means [for example, attacker 234],
The variable pitching means is a means that can change at least to any of a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state [eg, a closed state];
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state [eg, an open state];
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means is capable of displaying at least the display of the first type in the first period.
The display means is capable of displaying at least the first type of display in a second period,
The first period is a period [for example, a period of an interval between rounds] in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state.
The second period is a period during which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state [for example, a period during which the attacker opens state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player may be able to confirm the access information displayed on the display means regardless of the state of the variable entry means.

Also,
“The display means is a means that may display the first type of display during a period when the game state is a big hit game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the player can check the access information displayed on the display means during the big hit gaming state.

  The display means may display the first type of display over the entire period of the jackpot gaming state, or only during a part of the period (for example, the period of the interval between rounds). May be.

Furthermore, in the above explanation,
“A game machine having display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208],
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display [eg, two-dimensional code Q11],
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display [eg, error display],
The first type of display is a display including at least access information [for example, URL],
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the first case,
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the second case,
The first case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means.
The second case is a case where at least the second type of display is not displayed on the display means,
One display of the second type of display is the first display [for example, a character display “Pull out the sphere”],
One display of the second type of display is a second display [for example, a character display of “door opening error”],
One display of the first type of display is a third display [eg, two-dimensional code Q11],
At least a part of the first display [for example, a character display “please pull out the ball”] is the third display [for example, two-dimensional] in the first game state [for example, jackpot game state]. Code Q11] is a display that overlaps at least a part of the code [for example, the case shown in FIG. 79 (b)],
The second display [for example, character display of “door open error”] overlaps the third display [for example, two-dimensional code Q11] in the first gaming state [for example, jackpot gaming state]. Display that is not displayed [for example, display in the case shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics. Further, the access information displayed on the display means may be allowed to be confirmed by the player regardless of the presence or absence of the second type of display. In addition, the second type of display overlaps the first type of display, so that the player's line of sight pays attention to the first type of display, so that the display related to the access information is displayed. It may be possible to prevent the person from overlooking.

  The above-mentioned note can be applied to this game table as well, which will be described later. The above-mentioned writing can also be applied to “”.

  The second display may be a display that may overlap the third display in the second gaming state. The second gaming state here may be a state different from the first gaming state. For example, if the first gaming state is a jackpot gaming state, the second gaming state is displayed on the member registration screen. This is the state displayed on the display means. The overlap is, for example, a state in which all or a part of the third display is covered from the player side, and the overlapped portion is difficult or invisible to be seen by the player. More specifically, the overlap may be based on layer management (relationship between the back layer and the near layer), or may be drawn from the beginning in the same layer. Good.

  In addition, the first display may be a display in which only part of the first display overlaps part or all of the third display in the first gaming state, or all of the first display may be the first game. In the state, the display may overlap a part or all of the third display.

  As for the above-mentioned remarks, a game table characterized by “~” described later. The same applies to the above.

Also,
“In the third case, the display means may start displaying the second type of display,
In the fourth case, the display means is a means that may start displaying the first type of display,
The third case is a case where at least the first type of display is displayed on the display means [for example, a case shown in FIG. 68 (b)]
The fourth case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means [for example, the case shown in FIG. 68 (e)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the display relating to the access information is displayed.

Also,
“The second type of display is an error display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the display related to the access information is displayed by displaying the error by displaying the error on the display means.

Also,
“Variable ball entry means [for example, attacker 234],
The variable pitching means is a means that can change at least to any of a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state [eg, a closed state];
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state [eg, an open state];
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means is capable of displaying at least the display of the first type in the first period.
The display means is capable of displaying at least the first type of display in a second period,
The first period is a period [for example, a period of an interval between rounds] in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state.
The second period is a period during which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state [for example, a period during which the attacker opens state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player may be able to confirm the access information displayed on the display means regardless of the state of the variable entry means.

Also,
“The display means is a means that may display the first type of display during a period when the game state is a big hit game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the player can check the access information displayed on the display means during the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of changing the display size of the two-dimensional code by the player's operation.

  The operation key unit 190 described with reference to FIG. 16 has a cross key 191, an OK button 192, and a cancel button 193. The cross key 191 is an up, down, left, or right button, and has a selection function for a cursor transition or a select effect on a setting screen that can be set by the player. The OK button 192 has a determination function on a setting screen that can be set by the player. The cancel button 193 has a function of canceling transition or determination to the previous screen on the setting screen that can be set by the player. In addition to the OK button 192, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 191 and the cancel button 193 may also function as the effect button 136. Conversely, the effect button 136 may also function as the various buttons 191 to 193 described above.

  Furthermore, the operation key unit 190 may have a function of enlarging or reducing an image displayed on the display device. For example, when the upper button of the cross key 191 is pressed, enlarged display can be performed, when the lower button is pressed, reduced display, or when the left button is pressed, enlarged display can be performed, and when the right button is pressed, reduced display can be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 81, the left button of the cross key 191 has an enlarged display function, and the right button has a reduced display function.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a), a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the display of the big hit game effect of the sixth round. In addition, an image of the operation key unit 190 is displayed at the right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is explained that the left button of the cross key 191 has an enlarged display function by “large” display, and “small” display. Describes that the right button has a reduced display function.

  When the player presses the left button of the cross key 191, the two-dimensional code Q11 is enlarged and displayed in an overlapping manner on all of the display of the big hit game effect. Further, the enlarged two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed in the upper right “decoration 7” and the image of the operation key unit 190 in the lower right which are not overlapped before the enlarged display (when the original size is displayed). It overlaps even partly.

  Note that the position and angle (orientation) of the two-dimensional code Q11 may be changed by operating the operation key unit 190.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b), a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the display of the sixth round jackpot game effect, and further, the two-dimensional code acquisition is performed. In the promotion image 2073, an error display of black characters “please remove the sphere” overlaps. The error display in black letters “please pull out the sphere” overlaps 30% or more of the two-dimensional code Q11, and the two-dimensional code Q11 cannot be read.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b), as in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a), the enlargement display function and the reduction display function of the cross key 191 are guided.

  When the player presses the left button of the cross key 191, the two-dimensional code Q11 is enlarged and displayed as in FIG. 81 (a). On the other hand, the error display overlapped with the two-dimensional code Q11 remains the original size, the ratio of the error display size to the two-dimensional code Q11 changes (becomes less than 30%), and the enlarged two-dimensional code is displayed. The code Q11 can be read. As described above, there is a case where the two-dimensional code cannot be read and the two-dimensional code can be read as the displayed two-dimensional code changes in size. On the other hand, there may be a case where the state where the two-dimensional code can be read is changed to a state where it cannot be read.

  In the description using FIG. 81, the character display that recommends obtaining the two-dimensional code Q11 (“GET two-dimensional code”) is deleted, and only the two-dimensional code Q11 is enlarged and displayed. That is, only the two-dimensional code Q11 in the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is enlarged and displayed, but the whole two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 may be enlarged and displayed.

  Furthermore, the operation key unit 190 may have a function of extending the display time limit of an image with a display time limit displayed on the display device. For example, it can be extended when the upper button of the cross key 191 is pressed, or can be extended when the OK button 192 is pressed.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of extending the display time limit of a two-dimensional code with a display time limit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82, a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed so as to overlap the display of the sixth round jackpot game effect. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 has a display time limit, and a remaining time display 2062 until the display time limit is displayed above the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073. The remaining time display 2062 here is “3 seconds remaining”. In addition, an image of the operation key unit 190 is displayed in the right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and when the operation key unit 190 is operated by a character display “extend when pressed”, the remaining time until the display deadline is extended. You are guided to be able to.

  When the player presses the OK button 192 of the operation key unit 190, the “remaining 3 seconds” displayed on the remaining time display 2062 is extended by 10 seconds to become “remaining 13 seconds”. Even if the remaining time is extended, the image of the operation key unit 190 and the character display “extend when pressed” are still displayed in the right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and when the OK button 192 is pressed again. The remaining time is further extended by 10 seconds, and thereafter the extension can be repeated up to a predetermined number of times. When the number of times of extension (the number of times the OK button 192 has been pressed) reaches a predetermined number, the image of the operation key unit 190 and the character display “extend when pressed” disappear. It should be noted that the extension may be allowed to be repeated indefinitely or only once.

  FIG. 83A is a diagram showing an example in which a display indicating the type of the two-dimensional code is displayed at the same time.

  A two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 includes the identification information “No. 3” in addition to the two-dimensional code Q11 and a character display that recommends acquiring the two-dimensional code Q11 (“2D code is GET)”. A display has been added. This identification information display is a display for identifying the type of the displayed two-dimensional code (for example, for member registration, No. n mission clear confirmation, jackpot type confirmation, etc.), and the player It is possible to determine whether or not access has already been made by the information display.

  The identification information display may be a display for identifying individual information within the same type (for example, whether or not a privilege is granted by accessing).

  FIG. 83B is a diagram illustrating an example in which the error display overlaps the identification information display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (b), an error display of black characters “Please remove the sphere” is shown. This error display slightly overlaps the lower edge portion of the two-dimensional code Q11 and also overlaps the identification information display. Although the two-dimensional code Q11 shown in FIG. 83B can be read, the identification information display is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 84A is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of two-dimensional codes are displayed simultaneously.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (a), a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 'is displayed so as to overlap the display of the sixth round jackpot game effect. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 ′ shown in FIG. 84A includes two-dimensional codes Q 11 and Q 13 of different types (different identification information). That is, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84A, the first two-dimensional code Q11 and the second two-dimensional code Q13 are displayed side by side. Three or more types of two-dimensional codes may be displayed simultaneously, or a plurality of the same two-dimensional codes may be displayed simultaneously. Furthermore, displaying a plurality of two-dimensional codes at the same time means that information or benefits cannot be obtained unless a plurality of two-dimensional codes are read and a plurality of URLs are accessed, or if a plurality of two-dimensional codes are not read. This can also be applied to the case where the URL is not completed.

  FIG. 84B is a diagram illustrating an example in which the error display overlaps a plurality of two-dimensional codes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (b), a black character error display “please remove the ball” is shown. This error display overlaps both the first two-dimensional code Q11 displayed side by side and the second two-dimensional code Q13. That is, the error display overlaps the first two-dimensional code Q11 by more than 30%, and the second two-dimensional code Q13 overlaps by less than 30%. As a result, the first two-dimensional code Q11 cannot be read, but the second two-dimensional code Q13 can be read.

  The first two-dimensional code Q11 may be readable and the second two-dimensional code Q13 may not be readable. The error display overlaps both the first two-dimensional code Q11 and the second two-dimensional code Q13 or one of the two-dimensional codes so that both the two-dimensional codes Q11 and Q13 cannot be read. Alternatively, the two-dimensional codes Q11 and Q13 may be overlapped so as to be readable. In addition, the error display may overlap one or a plurality of two-dimensional codes among three or more two-dimensional codes, or all the two-dimensional codes so that they cannot be read, or can be read. May overlap.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which a two-dimensional code is displayed on the first display means and the second display means.

  FIG. 85 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the first display means and a sub display means 209 corresponding to the second display means. The sub display means 209 is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is fixedly disposed directly above the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. Further, the size of the display screen is smaller in the sub display means 209 than in the decorative symbol display device 208. The size of the display screen may be the same between the sub display unit 209 and the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition to the sub display means 209, third, fourth,... Display means may be provided.

  In FIG. 85 (a), a two-dimensional code acquisition promoting image 2073 is displayed on the sub display means 209. The two-dimensional code may be displayed on at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit.

  In FIG. 85 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round number display (“6R”), a character display of “decoration 7”, and a jackpot game effect display in which the character C1 appears. Other displays such as warning display, notification display, instruction display, suggestion display, error display, production display other than these displays are displayed on at least one of the first display means and the second display means. Also good.

  FIG. 85B is a diagram showing an example in which a two-dimensional code is moved and displayed from the second display unit to the first display unit.

  In the sub display means 209 shown at the left end of FIG. 85 (b), a two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed and a two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 has a two-dimensional code. Is not displayed.

  In the state shown in the center of FIG. 85 (b), the two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed across both the sub display means 209 and the decorative symbol display device 208, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub display means 209. Q11 appears to be moving toward the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, the two-dimensional code displayed across the plurality of display units may be in a readable state or in an unreadable state.

  The two-dimensional code is not displayed on the sub display means 209 shown at the right end of FIG. 85 (c), but the two-dimensional code acquisition promoting image 2073 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Q11 is displayed, and it appears that the two-dimensional code Q11 displayed on the sub display means 209 has moved to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Here, when the two-dimensional code is displayed only on one of the display means (in the case of the left end and the right end in FIG. 85 (c)), the two-dimensional code is displayed across a plurality of display means. In the case (in the middle of FIG. 85C), the same two-dimensional code is displayed, but a different two-dimensional code may be displayed. For example, in the former case, a two-dimensional code from which original information can be read may be displayed, and in the latter case, a two-dimensional code from which information different from the original can be read may be displayed, or vice versa. May be.

  Contrary to the example here, the two-dimensional code may be moved and displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display means 209, or two or more display means may be reciprocally displayed. Alternatively, two or more display units may be cyclically displayed, or two or more display units may be randomly displayed. Further, the movement display of the two-dimensional code may be started automatically in accordance with the effect program, may be started by pressing an operation means such as the effect button 136, mission completion, etc. You may make it start on the occasion. Furthermore, the movement or the movement direction may be changed according to the operation of the cross key 191 of the operation key unit 190.

  FIG. 85 (c) shows that when the two-dimensional code is moved and displayed from the second display means to the first display means, the display size of the two-dimensional code changes according to the size of the screen of the display device. It is the figure which showed the example to do.

  As described above, the size of the display screen is smaller in the sub display means 209 than in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state shown in the center of FIG. 85 (c), the upper half of the two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed on the sub display means 209, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays two as in the state shown in the center of FIG. 85 (b). The lower half of the dimension code Q11 is displayed. Of the two-dimensional code Q11, the size of the lower half displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the size of the upper half displayed on the sub display means 209. That is, a portion of the two-dimensional code Q11 that has moved to the decorative symbol display device 208 side is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the size of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown at the right end of FIG. 85 (c), the two-dimensional display is enlarged until it overlaps the entire display of the jackpot game effect and overlaps part of the character display of “decoration 7”. The code Q11 is displayed.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example in which the sub display unit 209 operates.

  The sub display means 209 shown in FIG. 86 can be operated on the player side with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation of the sub display means 209 may be started automatically according to the effect program, may be started by pressing an operation means such as the effect button 136, and mission achievement, etc. You may make it start as an opportunity. Further, it may be operated or the operating direction may be changed according to the operation of the cross key 191 of the operation key unit 190.

  The sub display means 209 shown in FIG. 86 (a) can be moved up and down on the player side from the decorative symbol display device 208, and the position of the sub display means 209 shown at the left end is the initial position of the sub display means 209. Equivalent to. A two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed on the sub display means 209 located at the initial position.

  The sub display means 209 shown in the center of FIG. 86A is lowered from the initial position, and the lower end portion of the sub display means 209 overlaps the upper end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 continues to be displayed on the sub display means 209 that moves downward.

  The sub display means 209 shown at the right end of FIG. 86A is further lowered, and about 80% of the sub display means 209 overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the left half of the character display of “decoration 7” displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the sub display means 209 displaying the two-dimensional code Q11.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a view of the sub display means 209 and the decorative symbol display device 208 as viewed from the side. The right side of the figure is the player side (front side), and the left side is the board side (rear side). . The decorative symbol display device 208 is parallel to a transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 1) not shown here.

  The sub display means 209 shown in FIG. 86 (b) is rotatable in the front-rear direction above and on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display means 209 shown at the left end is in the decorative symbol display device. Compared to 208, it is inclined forward. In addition, a two-dimensional code (not shown) is displayed on the sub display means 209 shown at the left end of FIG. 86 (b).

  The sub display means 209 shown in the center of FIG. 86 (b) is rotated rearward from the initial position. A two-dimensional code (not shown) continues to be displayed on the sub display means 209 that rotates.

  The sub display means 209 shown at the right end of FIG. 86 (b) is further rotated and is in parallel with the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the transparent plate member 118 (not shown) is also parallel here. When the sub display unit 209 is parallel to the transparent plate member 118, the image displayed on the sub display unit 209 is less likely to be reflected on the transparent plate member 118, and reflection from the transparent plate member 118 is suppressed. The image displayed in 209 becomes easy to see. A two-dimensional code (not shown) is also displayed on the rightmost sub-display unit 209, and the two-dimensional code is easier to read by the external device than the sub-display unit 209 shown on the left end.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko machine equipped with a touch panel type display means.

  FIG. 87 (a) is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the player side.

  A touch panel display 203 is provided on the door 108 with a ball storage tray of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. This touch panel type display means 203 has both a display function and a position input function, and a two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed on the display means 203 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing the touch panel type display means 203 mounted on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 87 (a). A two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is displayed on the display means 203 shown on the left side of FIG. 87 (b). Further, on the right side thereof, a description of the position input function is displayed. That is, an arrow indicates the direction of tracing the display screen with a finger in order to “enlarge”, “reduce” and “rotate” the image displayed on the touch panel type display means 203. That is, it is displayed that it can be enlarged by a pinch-out operation, reduced by a pinch-in operation, and rotated by a rotate operation. It may be moved by a drag operation, or any display change may be made by a tap operation or a double tap operation.

  The display means 203 shown on the right side of FIG. 87 (b) shows a case where an enlargement operation (pinch-out operation) is performed on the display means 203 shown on the left side, and the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image 2073 is enlarged and displayed. Only the two-dimensional code Q11 is displayed large on the display screen. In this way, one or more elements of the two-dimensional code Q11 (first type display) can be changed by the operation of the operation means (here, the display means also serves as the operation means).

  Note that only the two-dimensional code may be displayed instead of the two-dimensional code acquisition promotion images 2073 and 2073 ′ described so far.

  The two-dimensional code is an example of a display related to access information. However, the display related to access information includes a three-dimensional code, a color code, a barcode, a URL of a WEB site, a left-eye image, and a right-eye image (3D An image such as a marker for glasses) or AR (augmented reality) may be used.

  In the small hit effect, the display related to the access information may not be displayed, or the display related to the access information may be displayed. In addition, the small hit effect and the latent probability changing big hit effect may be the same effect, and the small hit effect and the latent probability changing big hit effect may not be displayed. The display related to the access information may be displayed in the big hit effect of the latent probability change and may not be displayed in the small hit effect, or vice versa. Further, the small hit effect and / or the big hit effect of the latent probability change may be an effect different from a big hit with a ball (for example, a 16R big hit, a 15R big hit, and an 8R big hit).

  The sudden winning change jackpot effect may be an effect different from the latent winning effect jackpot effect and / or the small hit effect, or may be the same effect. Also, the sudden hit promising big hit effect may be different from a big hit with a ball (for example, a 16R big hit, a 15R big hit, an 8R big hit). Furthermore, the display related to the access information may not be displayed or may be displayed in the sudden hit effect of sudden change.

  The first display related to the access information may be displayed only during at least a part of the period between rounds. For example, the first display related to the access information may be temporarily deleted in response to the start of the inter-round interval, and the second display related to the access information may be displayed before the end of the inter-round interval. The first display related to access information may be deleted once a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the inter-round interval, or the first display related to access information is re-displayed after the end of the inter-round interval. You may do. When the first display related to the access information is once erased and then displayed again, the same image as the first display may be displayed, or an image different from the first display (related to the access information). , One display different from the first display (for example, the second display) may be displayed.

  The present invention can also be applied to a sealed pachinko machine.

  FIG. 88 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 88, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 88 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix A)
Display means;
Movable means;
Variable entry means,
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
The first type of display among the plurality of types of display is a display including at least access information,
The variable entry means is a means that can change at least from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least one display of the first type of display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) in a first period,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period,
The first period is a period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state,
The second period is a period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state,
At least a part of the movable means is means that may operate at least in the first case,
At least a part of the movable means is means that may operate at least in the second case,
The first case is a case where at least the first display is displayed on the display means.
The second case is a case where at least the first display is not displayed on the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix B)
Display means;
Variable entry means,
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
The first type of display among the plurality of types of display is a display including at least access information,
The variable entry means is a means capable of changing at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state when in the second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least one display of the first type of display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) in a first period,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period,
The first period is a period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state,
The second period is a period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state,
The first period is a period at least included in the first jackpot period of the second gaming state,
The second period is a period at least included in the first jackpot period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C)
Display means;
Variable entry means,
Control means;
A game machine equipped with
The control means is means capable of executing at least control of a plurality of gaming states,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
The first type of display among the plurality of types of display is a display including at least access information,
The variable entry means is a means that can change at least from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least one display of the first type of display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) in a first period,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period,
The first period is a period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state,
The second period is a period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display when the first gaming state is the first gaming state.
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display when the second gaming state is the second gaming state,
The first period is a period in any one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to C,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display different from the first display (hereinafter, “second display”) of the first type of display,
The second display is a display different from the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

The second display may be the same display as the first display. The first type of display may be a concept including a plurality of displays such as the first display, the second display, the third display, and so on. Further, each of the first display, the second display, the third display,... May be a display including a plurality of displays (Appendix E)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to D,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least one of the second type displays (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The display means is means capable of displaying the third display in the first case.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The second type of display may include the third display and one or more displays different from the third display. The display means may be a means capable of displaying three or more types of displays. The display means may be a means capable of displaying two or more types of display during a period in which the first display is displayed. Examples of the second type of display include error display, operation request notification (for example, operation request notification for operation means for effects such as a chance button and a touch panel), warning display (for example, refusal under 18 years old, fraud Prohibition display), production display, notice display, hold display (for example, a general map icon indicating the number of hold of the general map by the display number, a special map hold icon indicating the hold number of the special drawing by the display number, or a normal map or Special figure hold count display), symbol display (for example, decorative symbol or fourth symbol), original mode display (for example, menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demo display, power-on display (for example, power supply) Power on, power recovery, etc.).

(Appendix F)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to E,
The variable entry means is an attacker [variable prize opening or big prize opening],
A game stand characterized by that.

  An attacker is a variable prize opening or a big prize opening.

(Appendix G)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to F,
The variable pitching means is an electric chew [second special figure starting port].
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix H)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to G,
The access information is information for accessing information obtainable by using external means.
A game stand characterized by that.

The access information may be information that needs to use an external means. The external means referred to here may be an external device such as a portable terminal, a PC, or 3D glasses (Appendix I)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to H,
The display means includes at least a first area that can display an image (image display area) and a second area that does not display an image (frame portion).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display means described in Appendix I is particularly common to all “display means” described in this specification.

(Appendix J)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to I,
The movable means is directing means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix K)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to J,
The display means is a first display means,
The movable means is a means provided with a second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display displayed on the second display means (the first type display (the first display, the second display...)), The second type display (the third type display). Display))) is displayed on the first display means (the first type display (the first display, the second display ...), the second display May be overlapped with each other by the type of display (the third display ...).

  The second display means includes a third area (image display area) in which an image can be displayed and a fourth area (frame) in which no image is displayed, and the third display means in the second display means. Or the fourth region or the third region and the fourth region, the first region or the second region or the first region and the second region in the first display means. These areas may be overlapped. The “third area in the second display means” here may be a part or all of the third area, and the fourth area in the second display means. The region may also be a part or all of the fourth region. Further, “the first region in the first display unit” may be a part or all of the first region, and the second region in the first display unit. Alternatively, a part or all of the second region may be used.

(Appendix L)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to K,
The second period is a variable period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In other words, the attacker, which is an example of the variable pitching means, detects whether a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since the release start instruction command was turned on) or a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) of game balls have entered. The second period becomes a variable period since it is closed when it is done.

(Appendix M)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A to L,
The first display is at least partially overlapped by at least a portion of the movable means;
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the overlap may indicate that part or all of the movable means overlaps part or all of the first display, or part or all of the movable means is It may indicate that a part or all of the first display is arranged on the front side, and part or all of the movable means hides part or all of the first display. You may show that. Alternatively, when a part or all of the first display is hidden by part or all of the movable means, one display of the first type of display different from the first display (for example, The second display) may be changed or may not be changed.

(Appendix N)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display,
The first type of display is a display including at least access information;
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the first case,
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the second case,
The first case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means.
The second case is a case where at least the second type of display is not displayed on the display means,
At least a part of the second type display is a display that may overlap at least a part of the first type display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 0)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display,
The first type of display is a display including at least access information;
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the first case,
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the second case,
The first case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means.
The second case is a case where at least the second type of display is not displayed on the display means,
One display of the second type of display is a first display,
One display of the second type of display is a second display;
One display of the first type of display is a third display;
At least a portion of the first display is a display that may overlap at least a portion of the third display;
The second display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the game machines described in Supplementary Note P and Supplementary Note O may be game machines including the following items.

One display of the second type of display is the first display,
One display of the second type of display is the second display,
One display of the first type of display is the third display,
At least a part of the first display is a display that overlaps at least a part of the third display (hereinafter referred to as “fifth case”),
The second display may be a display that does not overlap the third display.

  The first display here may be, for example, a character display “please remove the ball”, and the second display here may be, for example, a character display “door open error”. The third display here may be, for example, a display of “two-dimensional code in the first gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state)”. The third display may be a display configured to be readable (access information can be accessed) in the fifth case.

In addition, one of the first type displays is a fourth display,
At least a part of the second display may be a display that may overlap at least a part of the fourth display.

  The fourth display here may be a display of “two-dimensional code in the second gaming state (for example, member registration screen state)”.

  Further, the first display may be a display that does not overlap the fourth display, and the third display may be a display having a display position different from that of the fourth display.

Furthermore, one of the first type displays is a fifth display,
The fifth display is the same display position as the third display,
At least part of the first display is a display that overlaps at least part of the fifth display (hereinafter referred to as “sixth case”),
The fifth display may be a display configured to be unreadable (access information cannot be accessed) in the sixth case.

  The fifth display here may be a display of “two-dimensional code in the first game state (for example, big hit game state) (access information is different from the third display)”.

  In addition, the error display, which is an example of the second type of display, is the bottom pan full error (“Remove the ball” display), door open error, ball shortage error, vibration detection error, magnet detection error, radio wave detection error Or one or more of electromagnetic wave detection errors. Further, any one or more of the error displays may be a display that overlaps the first type of display, or may be a display that does not overlap the first type of display.

  The first game state is: decorative symbol, blank symbol, hold icon, change icon, special figure hold number display, general figure hold number display, special figure fourth symbol, general figure fourth symbol, notice display, pre-read notice display, Tutorial display, special drawing effect display, general drawing effect display, background display, button press suggestion display, variation display, pseudo variation display, stop display, reach display, super reach display, jackpot display, outlier display, jackpot display effect, jackpot Round number display, count number display for each round, number of acquired balls, number of jackpot games, display of effects during change, display of effects during time reduction, launch direction suggestion display, display during look-ahead mode, regular display (for example, every hour) At least one of the regular effect display, demonstration screen display, volume setting display, light intensity setting display, effect information setting display, player information setting display, error display, Re or may be in a state that is doing a display that includes a.

  The second game state is: decorative symbol, blank symbol, hold icon, change icon, special figure hold number display, general figure hold number display, special figure fourth symbol, general figure fourth symbol, notice display, pre-read notice display, Tutorial display, special drawing effect display, general drawing effect display, background display, button press suggestion display, fluctuation display, pseudo-variation display, stop display, reach display, super reach display, jackpot display, off-line display, jackpot display effect, jackpot Round number display, count number display for each round, number of acquired balls, number of jackpot games, display of effects during change, display of effects during time reduction, launch direction suggestion display, display during look-ahead mode, regular display (for example, every hour) At least one of the regular effect display, demonstration screen display, volume setting display, light intensity setting display, effect information setting display, player information setting display, error display, Re or may be in a state that is doing a display that includes a.

  The first type of display may include a plurality of types of information (for example, data cells including cutout symbols, timing patterns, format information, alignment patterns, and access information). The second type of display may overlap.

  The second type of display may include characters. In addition, at least a part of the second type display may have a first transmittance that allows the player to access (read) the access information of the first type display, The access information of the first type of display may have a second transmittance that the player cannot access (cannot read).

  The display means may be a means capable of changing one or more elements (for example, size, display position, angle, display time, color, display layer) of the first type display.

  The display unit may be a unit that can change one or more elements of the first type display when the operation unit is operated.

  Further, the first type of display may be a display that can change from one of the first reading state and the second reading state to the other in accordance with a change in one or more elements. The first reading state may be a state where the player can access the access information, and the second reading state may be a state where the player cannot access the access information.

  The first type of display may be a display that can maintain one of the first reading state and the second reading state in accordance with a change in one or more elements.

  The display means may be capable of displaying a third type of display that can identify the first type of display. In this case, the access information can be identified, and the player may be able to determine whether access has already been made. In addition, when the access information can be accessed to obtain an image or a ringing melody, it may be possible to avoid a situation where the same data is acquired twice.

  The display means may be a means capable of simultaneously displaying the first display of the first type of display and the second display of the first type of display. Alternatively, the display unit may be a unit that can simultaneously display three or more of the first type displays.

  Further, the plurality of first type displays may each include information obtained by dividing specific access information.

  The second type of display may overlap one or more of the first type of display, the one or more being in the first reading state or the second reading state. Alternatively, one or more of the plurality may be in a first reading state or a second reading state.

  Further, while one of the first type displays (hereinafter referred to as “sixth display”) is displayed on the first display unit, one of the first type displays on the second display unit. (Hereinafter referred to as “seventh display”) may be displayed.

  The first display means can change one or more elements of the sixth display, and the second display means can change one or more elements of the seventh display, The sixth display may be changeable simultaneously with the seventh display.

  In addition, one of the first type of displays (eighth display) is a display configured to be unreadable (access information cannot be accessed) even if the second display does not overlap. May be.

  The first type of display is a display including at least a first color (for example, black) and a second color (for example, white), and the second type of display is at least a third color ( For example, at least part of the display of the second type is displayed on the first color by displaying the third color on at least part of the part of the second color. It may be a display that may overlap at least a part of the display of this kind.

  The third color may be the first color, the second color, or may be different from both the first color and the second color.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative design display device 2085 Access image display area 209 Sub display means 210 General-purpose display device 212 First special-purpose display device 214 Second special-purpose display device 228 General-purpose display start port 230 First special-purpose display start port 232 First 2 Special drawing start port 2321 Blade member 234 Variable winning port 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit 2073 Two-dimensional code acquisition promotion image Q1-Q3, Q11-Q13, Q31, Q32 Two-dimensional code

Claims (5)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display,
The first type of display is a display including at least access information;
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the first case,
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in the second case,
The first case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means.
The second case is a case where at least the second type of display is not displayed on the display means,
The second type display is a display that may at least partially overlap at least a part of the first type display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The display means is a means that may start displaying the second type of display in the third case,
In the fourth case, the display means is a means that may start displaying the first type of display,
The third case is a case where at least the first type of display is displayed on the display means,
The fourth case is a case where at least the second type of display is displayed on the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The second type of display is an error display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
With variable pitching means,
The variable pitching means is a means that can change at least to any of a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state;
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state,
The display means is capable of displaying at least the display of the first type in the first period.
The display means is capable of displaying at least the first type of display in a second period,
The first period is a period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the first state,
The second period is a period in which the variable pitching means is at least in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The display means is a means that may display the first type of display in a period of being a jackpot gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.